Ba93psgb PDF

EDB9300UEP
00404605
Operating Instructions
Global Drive
9300 servo position controller
These Operating Instructions are valid for the 93XX controllers of the versions:
33.932X- EP 1x. 2x
(9321 - 9328)
33.9329- EP 0x. 2x
(9329)
33.933X- EP 0x. 2x
(9330 - 9332)
33.932X- CP 1x. 2x
(9321 - 9328)
Controller type
Design:
C = Cold Plate
E = Enclosure IP20
IB = Module
Hardware version and index
Software version and index
Variant
Explanation
Crorresponds to the German edition of 08/1998

Edition of:
10/1998
Screen plate for mains connection
L1 L2 L3
Mains connection
and DC connection
+UG -UG
PE
RDY IMP Imax Mmax Fail
Detachable operating module

alternatively
Field buses
INTERBUS
1250 rpm
GND LO HI
MCTRL - N - ACT
ST1
A4 A3 A2 A1
System bus (CAN)
59 ST2
X5
39 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 28
X4
2 1
62 7
X6
63 7 4 3
Control terminals
Resolver input
X7
X8
Encoder input
1
Digital frequency input
X9
Screen connection
Digital frequency output
X10
PE
Screen plate for control connections

PTC connection
T1 T2
a
V W
Motor connection
Screen plate for motor cables
K35.0002
Contents
Preface and general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1.1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1.2
1.3
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2-1
2-2
2-2
General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Layout of the safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.1
3.2
3.3
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-7
3.4
How to use these Operating Instructions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1.1
Terminology used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2
What is new? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General data/Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1
Types 9321 to 9325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2
Types 9321 to 9324 with 200% overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3
Types 9326 to 9332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4
Fuses and cable cross-sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5
Mains filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4.1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-9
4-9
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-15
4-17
4-18
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-22
4-28
4-30
4-30
4-34
4.2
4.3
Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2
Standard assembly with fixing rails or fixing brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.3
Assembly with thermally separated power stage (punching) . . . . . . . .
4.1.4
Assembly of variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1
Protection of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2
Protection of the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3
Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4
Mains types/Mains conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.5
Interactions with compensation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6
Specification of the cables used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7
Power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7.1
Mains connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7.2
Motor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7.3
Connection of a brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7.4
DC bus connection of several drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8
Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8.1
Control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8.2
Assignment of the control terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8.3
Connecting diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.9
Motor temperature monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.9.1
User-specific characteristic for a PTC thermistor . . . . . .
4.2.10
Feedback systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of a CE-typical drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9300POSBA1098
0-1
Contents
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5.1
Before switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5.2
5.3
Initial switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commissioning sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-4
5.4
5.5
Switch on controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch on PC, start GDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
5-6
5.6
Generate parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.1
Adapt controller to the mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2
Adapt controller to the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3
Enter machine parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.4
Parameters for manual positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.5
Controller enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-10
5-11
5-12
5.7
Function test with manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
5.8
Enter positioning profile parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.8.1
Structure of a positioning program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.1.1
Tools for editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.1.2
Structure of a positioning profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.1.3
Enter parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.2
Save parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9.1
Load parameter set from the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9.2
Load parameter set from the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10.1
Description of the dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10.2
Parameters for homing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10.3
Manual homing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10.4
Program control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic control parameter identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.1
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2
Causes of faults and remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
Password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
During operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.1
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-4
6.2
0-2
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1
On the operating module 9371 BB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2
In Global Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information on operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1
Switching on the motor side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2
Controller protection by current derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9300POSBA1098
Contents
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7.1
Configuration with Global Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7.2
Monitoring
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7-2
7-2
7-4
7-6
....................................................
Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8.1
8.2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1
Structure of the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2
Working with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8-3
8-3
8-5
8.3
8.4
Fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rest of fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
8-11
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
10 Waste disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1
11 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
11.1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
11.2
11.3
Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2
11-65
11.4
11.5
Motor selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-74
11-78
11.6
11.7
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-79
11-80
9300POSBA1098
0-3
Contents
0-4
9300POSBA1098
Preface and general information
1.1
How to use these Operating Instructions ...

- The present Operating Instructions are used for operations concerning safety
measures on and with the 93XX servo position controllers. They contain
safety information which must be observed.
- All persons working on and with the 93XX position controllers must have the
Operating Instructions available and must observe the information and notes
relevant for their work.
- The Operating Instructions must always be in a complete and perfectly
readable state.
1.1.1
Terminology used
Term
93XX
Controller
Drive system
1.1.2
What is new?
Material No.
397 404
XXXXXX
1.2
In the following text used for

Any type of servo position controller (types 9321 ... 9332)
93XX Servo position controller
Drive systems with 93XX servo position controllers and other Lenze drive components
Edition
Sept. 1997
October
1998
Important
1st edition
2nd edition
Contents
Types 9321 to 9324 with 200 % overcurrent,
new function Automatic control parameter identification
Scope of supply
Scope of supply
- 1 servo position controller type 93XX
- 1 book of operating instructions
- 1 accessory kit (bits and pieces for mechanical and electrical installation)
Important
After reception of the delivery, check immediately whether the scope
of supply matches the accompanying papers. Lenze does not accept
any liability for deficiencies claimed subsequently.
Claim
- visible transport damage immediately to the forwarder.
- visible deficiencies/incompleteness immediately to your Lenze
representative.
9300POSBA1098
1-1
1.3
Legal regulations
Identification
Nameplate
CE-identification
Lenze controllers are unambiguously Conforms to the EC Low Voltage
designated by the contents of the
Directive
nameplate.
Application
as directed
93XX servo position controller

- Operate the controller only under the conditions prescribed in these operating instructions.
- are components:
- for open- and closed-loop control of variable speed drives with PM synchronous motors, asynchronous servo
motors or asynchronous standard motors.
- for installation in a machine.
- used for assembly together with other components to form a machine.
- are electric units for the installation into control cabinets or similar enclosed operating housing.
- comply with the requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive.
- are not machines for the purpose of the Machinery Directive.
- are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial purposes.
Drive systems with 93XX servo position controllers
- comply with the EMC Directive if they are installed according to the guidelines of CE-typical drive systems.
- can be used:
- for operation at public and non-public mains.
- for operation in industrial premises and residential areas.
- The user is responsible for the compliance of his application with the EC directives.
Any other use shall be deemed as inappropriate!
- The information, data, and notes in these instructions met the state of the art at the time of printing. Claims on
modifications referring to controllers which have already been supplied cannot be derived from the information,
illustrations, and descriptions.
- The specifications, processes, and circuitry described in these instructions are for guidance only and must be
adapted to your own specific application. Lenze does not take responsibility for the suitability of the process and
circuit proposals.
- The specifications in these instructions describe the product features without guaranteeing them.
- Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and operating interference caused by:
- disregarding the operating instructions
- unauthorized modifications to the controller
- operating errors
- improper working on and with the controller
- Warranty conditions: see Sales and Delivery Conditions of Lenze GmbH & Co KG.
- Warranty claims must be made to Lenze immediately after detecting the deficiency or fault.
- The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.
Material
Recycle
Dispose
Metal
Plastic
Assembled PCBs
-
Liability
Warranty
Waste
di
disposal
l
1-2
9300POSBA1098
Manufacturer
Lenze GmbH & Co KG
Postfach 101352
D-31763 Hameln
Safety information
2
2.1
Safety information
General safety information
Safety and application notes for controllers

(according to: Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)
1. General
During operation, drive controllers may have, according to their
type of protection, live, bare, in some cases also movable or
rotating parts as well as hot surfaces.
Non-authorized removal of the required cover, inappropriate use,
incorrect installation or operation, creates the risk of severe injury
to persons or damage to material assets.
Further information can be obtained from the documentation.
All operations concerning transport, installation, and
commissioning as well as maintenance must be carried out by
qualified, skilled personnel (IEC 364 and CENELEC HD 384 or
DIN VDE 0100 and IEC report 664 or DIN VDE 0110 and national
regulations for the prevention of accidents must be observed).
According to this basic safety information qualified skilled
personnel are persons who are familiar with the erection,
assembly, commissioning, and operation of the product and who
have the qualifications necessary for their occupation.
2. Application as directed
Drive controllers are components which are designed for
installation in electrical systems or machinery.
When installing in machines, commissioning of the drive
controllers (i.e. the starting of operation as directed) is prohibited
until it is proven that the machine corresponds to the regulations
of the EC Directive 89/392/EEC (Machinery Directive); EN 60204
must be observed.
Commissioning (i.e. starting of operation as directed) is only
allowed when there is compliance with the EMC Directive
(89/336/EEC).
The drive controllers meet the requirements of the Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC. The standards of the EN 50178/ DIN VDE
0160, EN 60439-1/DIN VDE 0660 part 500 and EN60146/DIN
VDE 0558 are applicable to drive controllers.
The technical data and information on the connection conditions
must be obtained from the nameplate and the documentation and
must be observed in all cases.
3. Transport, storage
Notes on transport, storage and appropriate handling must be
observed.
Climatic conditions must be observed according to prEN 50178.
4. Erection
The devices must be erected and cooled according to the
regulations of the corresponding documentation.
The drive controllers must be protected from inappropriate loads.
Particularly during transport and handling, components must not
be bent and/or isolating distances must not be changed. Touching
of electronic components and contacts must be avoided.
Drive controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components
which can easily be damaged by inappropriate handling. Electrical
components must not be damaged or destroyed mechanically
(health risks are possible!).
5. Electrical connection
When working on live drive controllers, the valid national
regulations for the prevention of accidents (e.g. VBG 4) must be
observed.
The electrical installation must be carried out according to the
appropriate regulations (e.g. cable cross-sections, fuses, PE
connection). More detailed information is included in the
documentation.
Notes concerning the installation in compliance with EMC - such
as screening, grounding, arrangement of filters and laying of
cables - are included in the documentation of the drive
controllers. These notes must also be observed in all cases for
drive controllers with the CE mark. The compliance with the
required limit values demanded by the EMC legislation is the
responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine.
6. Operation
Systems where drive controllers are installed must be equipped,
if necessary, with additional monitoring and protective devices
according to the valid safety regulations, e.g. law on technical
tools, regulations for the prevention of accidents, etc.
Modifications of the drive controllers by the operating software
are allowed.
After disconnecting the drive controllers from the supply voltage,
live parts of the controller and power connections must not be
touched immediately, because of possibly charged capacitors. For
this, observe the corresponding labels on the drive controllers.
During operation, all covers and doors must be closed.
7. Maintenance and servicing
The manufacturers documentation must be observed.
This safety information must be kept!
The product-specific safety and application notes in these Operating Instructions must also be observed!
9300POSBA1098
2-1
Safety information
2.2
Layout of the safety information

- All safety information has a uniform layout:
- The icon characterizes the type of danger.
- The signal word characterizes the severity of danger.
- The note text describes the danger and gives information how to prevent
dangerous situations.
Signal word!
Note
Icons used
Warning of
hazardous
electrical voltage
Warning of
damage to
persons
Warning of a
general danger
Signal words
Danger!
Warns of impeding dangeU .
Consequences if disregarded:
Death or severe injuries
Warning!
Caution!
Warning of
damage to
material
Stop!
Other notes
Tip!
2.3
2-2
Warns of potential, very hazardous situation.

Possible consequences if disregarded:
Death or severe injuries
Warns of a potential, hazardous situation.
Light or minor injuries.
Warns of a potential damage to material.
Damage of the controller/drive system or its environment.
This note designates general, useful notes.
If you observe it, handling of the controller/drive system is
made easier.
Residual hazards
Protection of persons
After mains voltage disconnection the power terminals U, V, W and +UG, -UG carry hazardous voltages at
least 3 minutes after mains disconnection.
- Before working on the controller, check that no voltage is applied to the power terminals.
Controller protection
Cyclic connection and disconnection of the controller supply at L1, L2, L3 or +UG, +UG may overload the
internal input current load:
- Allow at least 3 minutes between disconnection and reconnection.
Overspeeds
Drive systems can reach dangerous overspeeds (e.g. setting high field frequencies for motors and
machines which are not suitable):
- The controllers do not offer any protection against these operating conditions. Use additional components for this.
9300POSBA1098
Technical Data
3.1
Technical data
Features
- Single axis in narrow design
- thus space-saving installation
- Power range: 370 W to 75 kW
- uniform control module and thus uniform connection for the control cables
over the complete power range
- Heat sink can be separated
- the cooling can be achieved outside the control cabinet
(punching or Cold Plate)
- Power connections from the top (supply) or from the bottom (motor)
- simple connection for multi-axis applications
- Direct connection of resolver and encoder feedback
- simple connection via prefabricated cables (accessories)
- connecting cables can be plugged
- Point-to-point positioning
- with or without velocity changeover
- Touch probe positioning
- Absolute or relative positioning
- S-ramps
- Homing according to different modes
- Manual homing
- Manual positioning
- Manual positioning with intermediate stop
- Simple programming via PC
- Application configuration for control functions and input/output signals
- comprehensive function block library
- high flexibility in the adaptation of the internal control structure to the
application
- Integrated automation interface
- simple extensions of the controller functions
- System bus (CAN) for the connection of servo inverters and for the extension
of input and output terminals
- Approval of standard devices UL 508, File No. 132659 (listed)
- Approval 9371 BB (BAE) UL 508, File No. 132659 (listed)
9300POSBA1098
3-1
Technical Data
3.2
General data/ Operating conditions
Field
Vibration resistance
Permissible humidity
Values
Germanischer Lloyd, general conditions
Humidity class F without condensation
(medium relative humidity 85 %)
Permissible temperature ranges
during transport of the controller:

during storage of the controller:
during operation of the controller:
Permissible installation height h

Degree of pollution
Noise emission
Noise immunity
Insulation strength
Packing
3-2
-25 C +70 C
-25 C +55 C
0 C +40 C
+40 C +55 C
h 1000 m a.m.s.l.
1000 m a.m.s.l. h 4000 m a.m.s.l.
VDE 0110 part 2 pollution degree 2
Requirements acc. to EN 50081-2, EN 50082-1, IEC 22G-WG4 (Cv) 21
Limit value class A acc. to EN 55011 (industrial area) with mains filter A
Limit value class B acc. to EN 55022 (residential area) with mains filter B and installation to
control cabinet
Limit values maintained using mains filter.
Requirements acc. to EN 50082-2, IEC 22G-WG4 (Cv) 21 .
Requirements
Standard
Severity
ESD
EN61000-4-2 3, i.e. 8 kV for air discharge
and 6 kV for contact discharge
RF interference
(enclosure)
EN61000-4-3 3, i.e. 10 V/m; 27 to 1000 MHz
Burst
EN61000-4-4 3/4, i.e. 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge (on
mains cable)
IEC 1000-4-5 3, i.e. 1.2/50 s
1 kV phase-phase, 2 kV phase-PE
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110
acc. to DIN 4180
- 9321 to 9326: Dust-free packing
- 9327 to 9332: Delivery packing
Type of protection
IP20
IP41 on the heat-sink side for thermal separation (punching)
NEMA 1: Protection against contact
Approvals
CE:
UL508:
UL508C:
9300POSBA1098
without derating
with derating
without derating
with derating
Low Voltage Directive

Industrial Control Equipment
Power Conversion Equipment
Technical Data
3.3
Ratings
3.3.1
Types 9321 to 9325
Mains voltage
Alternative DC supply
Mains current with mains filter
Mains current without mains
filter
Type
Order No.
EVS9321-EP
EVS9322-EP
EVS9323-EP
EVS9324-EP
EVS9325-EP
EVS9321-EP
EVS9322-EP
EVS9323-EP
EVS9324-EP
EVS9325-EP
Type
Order No.
ar [V]
aG [V]
Ir [A]
EVS9321-CP
EVS9322-CP
EVS9323-CP
EVS9324-CP
EVS9325-CP
EVS9321-CP
EVS9322-CP
EVS9323-CP
EVS9324-CP
EVS9325-CP
320 V 0 % $ Ur $ 528 V 0 % ; 45 Hz 65 Hz 0 %
460 V 0 % $ UG $ 740 V 0 %
1.5
2.5
3.9
7.0
12.0
2.1
3.5
5.5
16.8
Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz

Motor ppower ((4-pole
p ASM))
Pr [kW]
0.37
Pr [hp]
0.5
Output power U, V, W (8 kHz*) S r8 [kVA]
1.0
Output power +UG, -UG 2)
PDC [kW]
2.0
Output current (8 kHz*)
Ir8 [A]
1.5
Ir16 [A]
1.1
max output current (8 kHz*)1)
Imax8 [A]
2.3
max output current (16 kHz*)1) Imax16 [A]
1.7
Max. standstill current (8 kHz*)
I08 [A]
2.3
Max. standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A]
1.7
0.75
1.0
1.7
0.75
2.5
1.8
3.8
2.7
3.8
2.7
1.5
2.0
2.7
2.2
3.9
2.9
5.9
4.4
5.9
4.4
3.0
4.0
4.8
0.75
7.0
5.2
10.5
7.8
10.5
7.8
5.5
7.5
9.0
0
13.0
9.7
19.5
14.6
19.5
14.6

p ASM))
Pr [kW]
0.37
0.75
1.5
3.0
Pr [hp]
0.5
1.0
2.0
4.0
Output power U, V, W (8 kHz*) S r8 [kVA]
1.2
2.1
3.2
5.8
PDC [kW]
2.0
0.75
2.2
0.75
Ir8 [A]
1.5
2.5
3.9
7.0
Ir16 [A]
1.1
1.8
2.9
5.2
1)
max output current (8 kHz*)
Imax8 [A]
2.3
3.8
5.9
10.5
1.7
2.7
4.4
7.8
I08 [A]
2.3
3.8
5.9
10.5
Max. standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A]
1.7
2.7
4.4
7.8
Motor voltage
aM [V]
0 - 3 UMains
Power loss (operation with Irx)
Pv [W]
100
110
140
200
Power derating
[%/K]
40 C < Ta < 55 C: 2 %/K (no UL approval)
[%/m]
1000 m a.m.s.l. h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5 %/1000 m
Weight
m [kg]
3.5
3.5
5.0
5.0
1)
2)
*
5.5
7.5
10.8
0
13.0
9.7
19.5
14.6
19.5
14.6
260
7.5
The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned
here and 2 minutes base load with 75 % INx.
When operated under rated load, the controller can supply this power in addition.
Chopping frequency of the inverter (C0018)
9300POSBA1098
3-3
Technical Data
3.3.2
Types 9321 to 9324 with 200% overcurrent

Type
9321
9322
9323
9324
Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400 V /

p ASM))
Pr [kW]
Pr [hp]
Output power U, V, W (8 kHz)
S r8 [kVA]
Output current (8 kHz) 2)
Ir8 [A]
Ir16 [A]
max output current (8 kHz)1)
Imax8 [A]
Imax16 [A]
Max. standstill current (8 kHz)
I08 [A]
I016 [A]
50 Hz/60 Hz
0.37
0.5
1.0
1.5
1.1
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
0.75
1.0
1.7
2.5
1.8
5.0
3.6
5.0
3.6
1.5
2.0
2.7
3.9
2.9
7.8
5.8
7.8
5.8
3.0
4.0
4.8
7.0
5.2
14.0
10.4
14.0
10.4
Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 480 V /

p ASM))
Pr [kW]
Pr [hp]
Output power U, V, W (8 kHz)
S r8 [kVA]
Ir8 [A]
Ir16 [A]
Imax8 [A]
Imax16 [A]
I08 [A]
I016 [A]
50 Hz/60 Hz
0.37
0.5
1.2
1.5
1.1
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
0.75
1.0
2.1
2.5
1.8
5.0
3.6
5.0
3.6
1.5
2.0
3.2
3.9
2.9
7.8
5.8
7.8
5.8
3.0
4.0
5.8
7.0
5.2
14.0
10.4
14.0
10.4
1)
The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 10 second overcurrent with the current mentioned here and 50
seconds base load mit 44 % Irx .
Majority in
indiv. cases
Setting in
code C0022
thermal
continuous current
Maximum current
phase
Recovery phase
Continuous power
Imax %
150 % IrX
100 % IrX
150 % IrX for 60 s
75 % IrX for 120 s
Peak power
Imax >
150 % IrX
70 % IrX
200 % IrX for 10 s
44 % IrX for 50 s
2)
This output current Irx applies for a maximum current to be set under C022 which has not exceeded 150 % of
the rated controller current (nameplate).
If the maximum current is higher than this value, the continuous current reduces automatically to 70 % of the
original value.
For overcurrent diagram see chapter 7.2.3.
For all other data see chapter 3.3.1.
Tip!
You can change to Imax > 150 % IrX only when the controller is inhibited.
3-4
9300POSBA1098
Technical Data
3.3.3
Types 9326 to 9332

Type
Order No.
Mains voltage
Alternative DC supply
Mains current with mains filter
Mains current without mains
filter
EVS9326- EVS9327- EVS9328- EVS9329- EVS9330- EVS9331- EVS9332EP

EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
EP
EVS9326-EP
EVS9327-EP
EVS9328-EP
Type
EVS9326- EVS9327- EVS9328CP

CP
CP
Order No.
ar [V]
aG [V]
Ir [A]
EVS9326-CP
20.5
-
EVS9327-CP
EVS9329-EP
EVS9330-EP
EVS9331-EP
EVS9328-CP
320 V 0 % $ Ur $ 528 V 0 % ; 45 Hz 65 Hz 0 %
460 V 0 % $ UG $ 740 V 0 %
27.0
44.0
53.0
78.0
100
43.5
-

p ASM))
Pr [kW]
11.0
15.0
Pr [hp]
15.0
20.5
Output power UVW (8 kHz*)
S r8 [kVA]
16.3
22.2
PDC [kW]
0
10
Output current (8 kHz*)1)
Ir8 [A]
23.5
32.0
Output current (16 kHz*)1)
Ir16 [A]
15.3
20.8
Imax8 [A]
35.3
48.0
Imax16 [A]
23.0
31.2
max standstill current (8 kHz*)
I08 [A]
23.5
32.0
max standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A]
15.3
20.8
EVS9332-EP
22.0
30.0
32.6
4
47.0
30.6
70.5
45.9
47.0
30.6
30.0
40.0
40.9
0
59.0
38.0
88.5
57.0
52.0
33.0
45.0
60.0
61.6
5
89.0
58.0
133.5
87.0
80.0
45.0
55.0
73.5
76.2
0
110.0
70.0
165.0
105.0
110.0
70.0

p ASM))
Pr [kW]
11.0
18.5
30.0
37.0
45.0
55.0
Pr [hp]
15.0
25.0
40.0
49.5
60.0
73.5
Output power UVW (8 kHz*)
S r8 [kVA]
18.5
25.0
37.0
46.6
69.8
87.3
PDC [kW]
0
12
4.8
0
6
0
Ir8 [A]
22.3
30.4
44.7
56.0
84.0
105.0
Ir16 [A]
14.5
19.2
28.2
35.0
55.0
65.0
max output current (8 kHz*)1)
Imax8 [A]
33.5
45.6
67.1
84.0
126.0
157.5
21.8
28.8
42.3
52.5
82.5
97.5
I08 [A]
22.3
30.4
44.7
49.0
72.0
105.0
max standstill current (16 kHz*) I016 [A]
14.5
19.2
28.2
25.0
36.0
58.0
Motor voltage
aM [V]
0 - 3 UMains
Power loss
Pv [W]
360
430
640
810
1100
1470
Power derating
[%/K]
at 40 C < Ta < 55 C: 2.5%/K (no UL approval)
[%/m]
1000 m a.m.s.l. h $ 4000 m a.m.s.l.: 5%/1000m
Weight
m [kg]
7.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
36.5
59
135
-
75.0
100.0
100.5
0
145.0
90.0
217.5
135.0
126.0
72.0
90.0
120.0
104.0
6
125.0
80.0
187.5
120.0
111.0
58.0
1960
59
1)
The currents apply to a periodical load cycle with 1 minute overcurrent with the current mentioned here and 2
minutes base load with 75 % INx .
2) When operated under rated load, the controller can supply this power in addition.
* Chopping frequency of the inverter (C0018).
9300POSBA1098
3-5
Technical Data
3.3.4
Fuses and cable cross-sections

Mains input L1, L2, L3, PE/motor connection U, V, W
Type
yp
Operation without mains filter

Fuse
9321
9322
9323
9324
9325
9326
9327
9328
9329
9330
9331
9332
VDE
M 6A
M 6A
M 10A
M 32A
M 63A
-
E.l.c.b.
UL
5A
5A
10A
25A
63A
1)
2)
VDE
B 6A
B 6A
B 10A
B 32A
-
Cable
cross-section2)
mm2
AWG
1
17
1
17
1.5
15
6
9
16
6
-
Input +UG, -UG
Operation with mains filter

Fuse
VDE
M 6A
M 6A
M 10A
M 10A
M 20A
M 32A
35A
50A
80A
100A
125A
160A
E.l.c.b.
UL
5A
5A
10A
10A
20A
25A
35A
50A
80A
100A
125 A
175 A
VDE
B 6A
B 6A
B 10A
B 10A
B 20A
B 32A
-
Cable
cross-section2)
mm2
AWG
1
17
1
17
1.5
15
1.5
15
4
11
6
9
10
7
16
5
25
3
50
0
70
2/0
95
3/0
Fuse
Cable
cross-section2)
mm2 AWG
6.3A
1
17
6.3A
1
17
8A
1.5
15
12A
1.5
15
20A
4
11
40A
6
9
50A
10
7
80A
16
5
100A
25
3
2 x 80A 1) 2 x 16 2 x 5
2 x 100A 1) 2 x 25 2 x 3
3 x 80A 1) 3 x 16 3 x 5
The DC bus fuses are connected in parallel

The valid local regulations must be observed
For the operation of the controllers in a UL-approved plant:

- Use only UL-approved fuses and fuse holders:
- 500 V to 600 V in the mains input (AC)
- 700 V in the DC bus circuit
- Activation characteristic H or K5
- Only use UL-approved cables.
Tip!
UL-approved fuses and fuse holders can be obtained from e.g. Bussmann or
Ferraz.
Connection of the motor cables

- For functional reasons, the motor cables need not to be protected by fuses.
- Refer to the data listed in the table Operation with mains filter.
3-6
9300POSBA1098
Technical Data
3.3.5
Mains filters
Ratings (uk 6 %)
Type
yp
9321
9322
9323
9324
9325
9326
9327
9328
9329
9330
9331
9332
Mains current
1.5 A
2.5 A
4A
7A
13 A
24 A
30 A
42 A
54 A
80 A
100 A
135 A
Inductance
24 mH
15 mH
9 mH
5 mH
3 mH
1.5 mH
1.1 mH
0.8 mH
0.6 mH
0.42 mH
0.34 mH
0.25 mH
Lenze order number

for RFI degree A
EZN3A2400H002
EZN3A1500H003
EZN3A0900H004
EZN3A0500H007
EZN3A0300H013
EZN3A0150H024
EZN3A0110H030
EZN3A0080H042
EZN3A0060H054
EZN3A0042H080
EZN3A0034H100
EZN3A0025H135
for RFI degree B

EZN3B2400H002
EZN3B1500H003
EZN3B0900H004
EZN3B0500H007
EZN3B0300H013
EZN3B0150H024
EZN3B0110H030
EZN3B0080H042
EZN3B0060H054
EZN3B0042H080
EZN3B0034H100
EZN3B0025H135
The mains filters for RFI degree B contain additional RFI suppression components.
3.4
Dimensions
The dimensions of the controllers depend on the mechanical installation (see
chapter 4.1).
9300POSBA1098
3-7
Technical Data
3-8
9300POSBA1098
Installation
Installation
4.1
Mechanical installation
4.1.1
Important notes
- Use the controllers only as built-in devices!
- If the cooling air contains pollutants (dust, fluff, grease, aggressive gases):
- take suitable preventive measures , e.g. separate air duct, installation of
filters, regular cleaning, etc.
- Observe free space!
- You can install several controllers next to each other without free space in a
control cabinet.
- Ensure unimpeded ventilation of cooling air and outlet of exhaust air!
- Allow a free space of 100 mm at the top and at the bottom.
- Do not exceed the permissible ambient temperature during operation (see
chapter 3.2).
- With continuous oscillations or vibrations:
- Check whether shock absorbers are necessary.
Possible mounting positions
- Vertically on the control cabinet back panel with mains connections at the
top:
- with enclosed fixing rails or fixing brackets (see chapter 4.1.2).
- thermally separated with external heat sink.
Punching see chapter 4.1.3
Cold Plate see chapter 4.1.4
9300POSBA1098
4-1
Installation
4.1.2
Standard assembly with fixing rails or fixing brackets
B
Fig. 4-1
Dimensions for assembly with fixing rails/fixing brackets
Type
9321, 9322
9323, 9324
9325, 9326
9327, 9328,
9329
Fig.
A
A
B
C
a
78
97
135
250
b
384
384
384
402
b1
350
350
350
350
c
39
48.5
21.5
22
c1
92
206
d
365
365
365
370
d1
24
e*
250
250
250
250
e1
230
230
230
230
g
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
k
30
30
30
24
m
11
9330
9331, 9332
C
C
340
450
672
748.5
591
680
28.5
30.5
283
389
624
702
38
38
285
285
265
265
11
11
28
28
18
18
When using a plug-on fieldbus module:

Observe the free space required for the connection cables.
All dimensions in mm
Controllers 9321 to 9326

- Assembly preparation:
- Take out fixing rail(s) (accessory kit in the box) and mount on the controller
housing.
Controllers 9327 to 9332
- Remove cover:
- Loosen screws (X).
- Swing cover to the top and detach.
- Take accessory kit out of the interior of the controller.
- Assembly preparation:
- Take out fixing bracket and screws (accessory kit) and mount on the
controller housing.
4-2
9300POSBA1098
Installation
4.1.3
Assembly with thermally separated power stage

(punching)
You can mount the heat sink of the controllers 9321 to 9329 outside the control
cabinet to reduce the heat in the control cabinet. For this, you need an assembly
frame with seal (can be ordered from Lenze).
- Distribution of the power loss:
- approx. 65 % via the separated heatsink (heatsink + blower)
- approx. 35 % inside the controller
- The enclosure of the separated heatsink (heatsink + blower) is IP41.
- The rated data of the controller is still valid.
Preparation for assembly:
1. Lay the halves of the assembly frame into the slot provided on the
controller.
2. Push the frame halves together until the ends catch.
3. Slip the seal over the heat sink and lay into the slot provided.
9300POSBA1098
4-3
Installation
Dimensions of the types 9321 to 9326
Lenze
d1
b1 b
d1
c
c1
a
Fig. 4-2
a
112.5
131.5
135
Type
9321, 9322
9323, 9324
9325, 9226
*
Cut-out Z
9321, 9322
9323, 9324
9325, 9326
Dimensions for assembly with thermally separated power stage

b
385.5
385.5
385.5
c
60
79
117
Height
d
365.5
365.5
365.5
d1
105.5
105.5
105.5
e*
250
250
250
Width
350 3
9300POSBA1098
c1
95.5
114.5
137.5

Observe the free space required for the connection cables
4-4
b1
350
350
350
82 3
101 3
139 3
f
92
92
92
g
6.5
6.5
6.5
Installation
Dimensions of the types 9327 to 9329

l
g
Z
L
b
n
d4
d3
d2
d1 h
m
h
e
c1
c2
c3
a
K35.0017
Fig. 4-3
Dimensions for assembly with thermally separated power stage
Type
9327, 9328, 9329
*
a
280
b
379
c1
28
c2
140
c3
252
d1
41
d2
141
d3
238
d4
338
e *)
250
f
90
g
6
h
9

Cut-out Z
9327, 9328, 9329
Height
338 1
Width
238 1
k
20 2
l
259 2
m
20 2
n
359 2
All dimensionsin mm
9300POSBA1098
4-5
Installation
4.1.4
Assembly of variants
Variant EVS932X-CP (Cold Plate)
For installation in the control cabinet with other heat sinks in Cold Plate Technique.
Dimensions of the types 9321-CP to 9326-CP
Lenze
b1
Lenze
d b b1
Lenze
d b
b1
d b
c2
c
a
K35.0059
Fig. 4-4
Type
9321-CP
9322-CP
9323-CP
9324-CP
9325-CP
9326-CP
*
Dimensions for assembly in Cold Plate Technique
b1
c2
e*
78
381
350
48
367
168
6.5
97
381
350
67
367
168
6.5
135
381
350
105
38
367
168
6.5

4-6
9300POSBA1098
Installation
Dimensions of the types 9327-CP to 9328-CP
b1
Lenze
g
c2
e
c1
c
a1
a
K35.0056
Fig. 4-5
Type
9327-CP
9328-CP
*
Dimensions for assembly in Cold Plate Technique
a1
b1
c1
c2
e*
250
234
381
350
220
110
117
367
171
6.5

9300POSBA1098
4-7
Installation
- Observe the following points to comply with the technical data:

- Ensure sufficient ventilation of the heat sink.
- The free space behind the control cabinet back panel must be at least
500 mm.
- If you install several controllers in the control cabinet:
- Do not install the controllers on top of each other.
- The cooling path must not exceed the thermal resistances in the table:
Controller
Type
9321-CP
9322-CP
9323-CP
9324-CP
9325-CP
9326-CP
9327-CP
9328-CP
Cooling path
Power to be dissipated Pv [W]
80
80
100
155
210
360
410
610
R thmaxheat sink [K/W]

0.50
0.50
0.40
0.25
0.19
0.10
0.09
0.06
- The temperature of the cold plate must not exceed +85 C.

- Penetration depth t of the screws into the base plate of the controller:
PP $ W $ PP
- For the bore pattern and surface quality of the heat sink please consult the
factory.
- Apply heat conductive compound to the cold plate of the controller.
4-8
9300POSBA1098
Installation
4.2
Electrical installation
For information on the installation according to EMC see chapter 4.3.
4.2.1
Protection of persons
Danger!
All power terminals carry voltage up to 3 minutes after mains disconnection.
Symbol on the RCCB
Meaning
AC sensitive RCCB, type AC
pulsating-current sensitive RCCB, type A
universal-current sensitive RCCB, type B
Protection of persons and

animals
DIN VDE 0100 with residual-current-operated circuit breakers (RCCB):

- The controllers have an internal mains rectifier.In case of a short-circuit to frame, a DC fault current can prevent the activation of the AC-sensitive or pulse-current sensitive RCCB and thus
prevent the protective function for all electrical equipment operated on this RCCB. We therefore
recommend:
- pulse-current sensitive RCCB in systems with 820X controllers (L1/N).
- universal current RCCB in systems with 821X/822X/824X controllers (L1/L2/L3).
Rated fault current
Observe the rated fault current for the selection of the RCCB.
The RCCB may cause false tripping because of:
- capacitive leakage currents between cable screens (especially with long screened motor cables),
- the mains connection of several controllers at the same time,
- use of RFI filters.
Installation
You can install RCCBs only between the supplying mains and the controller.
Note for the use of

universal-current sensitive
RCCBs
- Universal-current sensitive RCCBs have been defined in the European standard EN 50178 (as of
Mains isolation / Protection

against contact
The control inputs and outputs of all controllers are mains isolated. Please observe the description
of the protection against contact on the following page.
Replace defective fuses
Replace defective fuses with the prescribed type only when no voltage is applied.
- For single drives, the controller carries a hazardous voltage up to three minutes after mains disconnection.
- In a drive network, all controllers must be inhibited and disconnected from the mains.
October 1997) for the first time. The EN 50178 was harmonized and has been effective since
October 1997. It supersedes the national standard VDE 0160. Universal-current sensitive RCCBs
are also described in the IEC 755.
- RCCBs with a rated fault current of:
- 30 mA are suitable only in systems with 820X controllers.
- 300 mA are suitable only in systems with controllers 821X/822X/824X.
Disconnect controller from the Make a safety connection between the controller and mains only via a contactor at the input side!
mains
- Please note that in a drive network all controllers must be inhibited.
9300POSBA1098
4-9
Installation
Insulation
The controllers have an insulation (isolating distance)between the power terminals
and the control terminals as well as to the housing:
- Terminals X1 and X5 have a double basic insulation (double isolating
distance, safety insulation according to VDE0160, EN50178). The protection
against contact is ensured without any further measures.
Danger!
- Terminals X3, X4, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10 have a simple basic insulation (simple
isolating distance).
- Protection against contact in case of fault is ensured only by additional
measures.
- If an external voltage supply (24 VDC) is used, the insulation level of the
cotnroller depends on the insulation level of the voltage source.
reinforced insulation
simple basic insulation
Fig. 4-6
4-10
9300POSBA1098
Basic insulation on the controller
Installation
4.2.2
Protection of the controller

Stop!
The controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components.
- Prior to assembly and service operations, the personnel must be free of
electrostatic charge:
- Discharging is possible by touching the PE fixing screw or another
grounded metal part in the control cabinet.
- Length of the screws for the connection of the screen cable/screen plate for
the types 9327 to 9332: < 12 mm
- Protection of the controller via external fuses (see chapter 3.3.4)
- Cover unused control inputs and outputs with plugs or with protective
covers (included in the scope of supply) for the Sub-D inputs.
- Frequent mains switching can overload the internal switch-on current
limitation. For cyclic mains switching, the controller can be switched on every
three minutes as a maximum.
- Operate the controller types 9324, 9326, 9328 and 9329 only with a suitable
mains mains filter (see chapter 3.3.5).
- In case of condensation, connect the controller to the mains voltage only
after the visible humidity has evaporated.
4.2.3
Motor protection
- Complete motor protection according to VDE:
- By overcurrent relays or temperature monitoring
- Required for group drives
(motors connected in parallel to a controller)
- We recommend to use a PTC or thermostat with PTC characteristic for
temperature monitoring of the motor.
Stop!
Lenze AC motors are equipped with PTC thermistors as a stanard. When using
motors of other brands, the measures required for the adaptation to the controller
must be carried out (see chapter 4.2.9).
- When using motors with insulation which is not suitable for inverter
operation:
- Please contact your motor supplier.
Lenze AC motors are designed for inverter operation.
- With the corresponding parameter setting, the controllers generate field
frequencies up to 600 Hz:
- When operating inappropriate motors, dangerous overspeeds may occur
and result in the destruction of the motor.
9300POSBA1098
4-11
Installation
4.2.4
Mains types/Mains conditions

Please observe the restrictions of each mains type!
Mains
With grounded neutral
(TT/TN mains)
Operation of the controllers

No restrictions
With isolated neutral

(IT mains)
Possible if the controller is protected in

the event of an earth fault in the
supplying mains
- by suitable equipment detecting the
earth fault and
- the controller is directly disconnected
from the mains
The operation is possible only with one Contact Lenze
variant
The DC voltage must be symmetrical to Controller will be destroyed whith grounded
PE
+UG conductor or -UG conductor
With grounded phase

DC supply via + UG/-UG
4.2.5
Notes
Observe controller ratings
- Observe the load of the shared N-conductor.
- R.m.s. current see chapter 3.3
- Possibly enlarge the cross-section of the
N-conductor
A safe operation is not ensured at the inverter
output in the event of an earth fault
Interactions with compensation equipment

- Controllers only consume a very small fundamental reactive power from the
AC mains. A compensation is therefore not necessary.
- If you operate controllers on mains with compensation equipment you have
to use chokes for this equipment.
- Please consult the supplier of compensation equipment.
4.2.6
Specification of the cables used

- The cables used must comply with the required approvals of the application
(e.g. UL).
- The prescribed minimum cross-sections of PE conductors must be
maintained in all cases. The cross-section of the PE conductor must be at
least as large as the cross-section of the power connections.
- The screening quality of a cable is determined by
- a good screen connection
- a low screen resistance
Only use screens with tin-plated or nickel-plated copper braids!
Screens of steel braid are not suitable.
- the contact ratio of the screen braid:
at least 70 % to 80 % with cover angle 90
4-12
9300POSBA1098
Installation
4.2.7
Power connections
Controller
9321 ... 9326
Preparation for the power connection

- Remove the covers of the power connections:
- Unlatch to the front by gentle pressure.
- Pull upwards (mains connection) or downwards (motor connection).
9327 ... 9332
- Remove cover:
- Loosen screws (X) (see Fig. 4-1).

- Swing cover to the top and detach.
- Take accessory kit out of the interior of the controller.
4.2.7.1
Mains connection
Types 9321 to 9326
Types 9327 to 9332
+UG
L1
L2
L3
+UG
PE
Correct screen connection with screened cables

(required parts in the accessory kit):
- Bolt screen plate on fixing bracket .
- Fix screen using cable lugs. Do not use as a strain
relief!
- To improve the screen connection: Connect screen
additionally at the stud next to the power connections.
Fig. 4-7
L1
L2
L3
-UG
-UG
PE
Correct screen connection with screened cables:

- Connect the screen with suitable clamp on the
conducting control cabinet mounting plate.
- To improve the screen connection: Connect screen
additionally at the stud PE next to the power connections.
Proposal for a mains connection
9300POSBA1098
4-13
Installation
- Connect mains cables to the screw terminals L1, L2, L3.

- Connect cables for brake unit (935X), supply module (934X) or further
controllers in the DC bus connection to the screw terminals +UG, -UG at the
top of the controller.
- Max. permissible cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques:
Terminals
Type
9321 - 9326
9327 - 9329
9330 - 9331
9332
max. permissible
cable cross-sections
4 mm2 1)
25 mm2 2)
95 mm2 2)
120 mm2 2)
L1, L2, L3, +UG, -UG
PE connection
0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)

3.4 Nm (30 lbin)
4 Nm (35 lbin)
7 Nm (62 lbin)
12 Nm (106.2 lbin)
1)
with plug connector: 6 mm 2

with wire crimp cap: 4 mm2
2) with ring cable lug: Cross-section is limited only by the cable duct in the housing
Fuses
Fuses and cable cross-sections
The specifications in chapter 3.3.4 are recommendations and refer to the

use
- in control cabinets and machines
- installation in the cable duct
- max. ambient temperature +40 C.
Selection of the cable cross-section Consider the voltage drop under load (acc. to DIN 18015 part1: $ 3 %) for
the selection.
Protection of the cables and the
controller on the AC side (L1, L2,
L3):
Protection of the cables and the

controller on the DC side
(+ UG, -UG):
For DC group drives or supply by
means of a DC source
Connection of a brake unit
Further information
Other standards
4-14
9300POSBA1098
- By standard commercial fuses.

- Fuses in UL-conform plant must have a UL approval.
- The rated voltages of the fuses must be dimensioned according to the
mains voltage at the site. The activation characteristic is defined by H or

K5.
- By means of recommended DC fuses.
- The fuses/fuse holders recommended by Lenze are all UL approved.
Please observe the notes in part F of the systems manual.
If the brake unit is connected to the terminals +UG/-UG, the fuses and
cross-sections listed in chapter 3.3.4 are not valid. These unit-specific data
can be obtained from the technical documentation of the brake unit.
For the protection of the cables and the controller, plese refer to chapter
Accessories.
The compliance with other standards (e.g.: VDE 0113, VDE 0289, etc.)
remains the responsibility of the user.
Installation
4.2.7.2
Motor connection
We recommend the use of screened motor cables only, because of the EMC safety.
Tip!
The screening of the motor cable is only required to comply with existing standards
(e.g. VDE 0160, EN 50178).
Types 9321 to 9326
T1 T2
W
U V
V W
U
PE
Correct screen connection with screened cables

(required parts in the accessory kit):
- Bolt screen plate on fixing bracket .
- Fix the screen of the motor cable and thermal
contact. Do not use as a strain relief!
- To improve the screen connection: Connect
screens additionally at the stud PE next to the
motor connections.
Types 9327 to 9329
PE
T1
Correct screen connection with screened cables:

- Fix the screen of the motor cable and thermal
contact. Do not use as a strain relief!
- To improve the screen connection: Connect
screens additionally at the stud PE next to the
motor connections.
T2
9300POSBA1098
4-15
Installation
Types 9330 and 9331

- Carry out strain relief using cable binders .
- Correct screen connection with screened cables:
PE
T1
- Apply motor cable screen to the screening

plate using clamp and screws M5x12 .
- Connect thermal contact at the stud PE next to
the motor connections over a large surface.
T2
M5 X 12
Type 9332
- Carry out strain relief using clamps and screws
PE
T1
T2
M4 X 12
M5 X 12
M4x12 .
- An additional strain relief/fixing is possible with
cable binders. .
- Correct screen connection with screened cables:
- Apply motor cable screen to the screening
plate using clamp and screws M5x12 .
- Connect thermal contact at the stud PE next to
the motor connections over a large surface.
Fig. 4-8
Proposal for the motor connection
- Observe the max. permissible length of the motor cable:

Ur = 400 V (+10 %)
Type
9321/9322
9323 - 9332
4-16
9300POSBA1098
f chop = 8 kHz
up to 50 m
up to 50 m
f chop = 16 kHz
up to 45 m
up to 50 m
Ur = 480 V (+10 %)
f chop = 8 kHz
up to 50 m
up to 50 m
f chop = 16 kHz
up to 25 m
up to 50 m
Installation
- Connect motor cables to the screw terminals U, V, W.

- Observe correct pole connection.
- Max. permissible cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques:
Terminals
Type
Max. permissible
cable cross-sections
9321 - 9326
4 mm2 1)
9327 - 9329
9330 - 9331
9332
25 mm2 2)
95 mm2 2)
120 mm2 2)
U, V, W
PE connection
0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

3.4 Nm
(4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)
(30 lbin)
4 Nm (35 lbin)
7 Nm (62 lbin)
12 Nm (106.2 lbin)
Screen/
Strain relief
T1, T2
0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

(4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)
0 5 ... 0.6
0.5
0 6 Nm
3.4 Nm (30 lbin)
(4.44 ... 5.3
(4
5 3 lbin)
M4: 1.7 Nm (15 lbin)
1)
With plug connector: 6 mm2

With wire crimp cap: 4 mm2
2) With ring cable lug: Cross-section is limited only by the cable duct in the housing
Tip!
Switching on the motor side of the controller is permitted only for emergency
switch-off.
4.2.7.3
Connection of a brake unit

- When connecting a brake unit (brake module with internal brake resistor or
brake chopper with external brake resistor) observe the corresponding
Operating Instructions in all cases.
Stop!
- Design the circuit so that, if the temperature monitoring of the brake unit is
activated,
- the controllers are inhibited (X5/28 = LOW).
- the mains is disconnected.
Example see chapter 4.3 or Fig. 4-9.
9300POSBA1098
4-17
Installation
4.2.7.4
DC bus connection of several drives

Decentralized supply with brake module
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
OFF
F1 F2 F3
K1
F4 F5 F6
Z4
RB
ON
Z1
Z2
RB
K1
F7
RB1 RB2
PE
+UG -UG
L1
9352
L2
L3
PE
+UG
F9 F10
F8
L1
-UG
L2
932X - 933X
L3
PE
+UG
-UG
932X - 933X
Z3
U
PE
PE
28
PE
A4
PE
K1
A4
K1
X2
X1
RFR
RFR
M
PE
Fig. 4-9
Z1, Z2
Z3
Z4
F1...F5
K1
28
3~
PE
3~
K35.0113
Decentralized supply for DC bus connection of several drives`

Mains filter (for dimensioning see systems manual, part F)
Brake chopper
Brake resistor (for r.m.s. current monitoring see systems manual, part F)
Fuse (see chapter 3.3.4 and 4.2.7.1)
Main contactor
Stop!
- Set the DC bus voltage thresholds of controller and brake unit to the same
values:
- Controller using C0173
- Brake unit using switches S1 and S2
- A bimetallic relay is required for the monitoring of the mains supply.
Tip!
Please observe the specifications in part F of the systems manual and the application report DC bus connection for the dimensioning and rating of the
components.
4-18
9300POSBA1098
Installation
Central supply with supply module

- When connecting the supply module, the corresponding Operating
Instructions must be observed.
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1...F3
Z1
F4
L1
L2
L3
PE
+UG
9341 - 9343
-UG
F6
F5
L1
L2
L3
PE
+UG
F7
-UG
F8
L1
L2
L3
PE
+UG
F9
-UG
932X - 933X
932X - 933X
PE
PE
Z2
U
M
PE
Fig. 4-10
Z1
Z2
F1...F5
K1
3~
M
PE
3~
K35.0114
Central supply for DC bus connection of several drives

Mains filter
Supply module
Fuses (see chapter 3.3.4 and 4.2.7.1)
Main contactor
Tip!
If the power supply of the supply module is not sufficient, a parallel supply can be
installed via the mains input of a controller (see systems manual, part F). In this case,
the controller can only be operated with the assigned mains filters (at least acc. to
limit value class A).
9300POSBA1098
4-19
Installation
4.2.8
Control connections
4.2.8.1
Control cables
- Connect control cables to the screw terminals
max. permissible cable cross-section
1.5 mm2
Screw-tightening torques
0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lbin)
- We recommend a one-side screening of all cables for analog signals
to avoid signal distortion.

- Connect the screens of the control cables:
- with the collective screen plate to the front metal surface

(max. screw length 12 mm).
4.2.8.2
Assignment of the control terminals

Protection against inverse polarity
- This protection prevents the wrong connection of the internal control inputs.
It is however possible to overcome the protection against polarity reversal by
applying great force. The controller cannot be enabled in this case.
Fig. 4-11
4-20
9300POSBA1098
63 7 4 3 59 STSTA4A3A2A1
62 7 2 1
39 E5E4E3E2E128
GND
LOHI
Overview
X4
X5
X6
Layout of the control connections on the front of the controller
Installation
Analog
inputs
Terminal Use
(Default setting is printed in bold)
1, 2
Difference input master voltage
(Main speed setpoint)
6
4
2
5
3
1
Level
Data
-10 V to + 10 V
Resolution:
5 mV (11 bit + sign)
-20 mA to +20 mA
Resolution:
20 A (10 bit + sign)
-10 V to + 10 V
Resolution:
Resolution:
Resolution:
LOW: 0 +4 V
HIGH: +13 +30 V
Jumper X3
Difference input master current
3, 4
Analog
outputs
62
63
Digital
g
i t
inputs
7
28
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
Digital
p
outputs
A1
A2
A3
A4
39
59
6
4
2
5
3
1
Jumper X3
Difference input master voltage
Jumper X3 has not
effect
(Additional speed setpoint)
Monitor 1
(Actual speed)
Monitor 2
(Torque setpoint)
Internal ground, GND
Controller enable (RFR)
Freely assignable
(remove CW rotation / QSP)
Freely assignable
(remove CCW rotation / QSP)
Freely assignable
(enable JOG-setpoint 1)
Freely assignable
(TRIP set)
Freely assignable
(reset fault - TRIP-reset)
Freely assignable
(TRIP)
Freely assignable
(nact < nx)
Freely assignable
(RDY)
Freely assignable
(Mmax)
Ground of the digital inputs and outputs
Supply input of the control module:
24 V external (I > 1 A)
-10 V to + 10 V;
max. 2 mA
-10 V to + 10 V;
max. 2 mA
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
IInputt currentt att 24 V

V:
8 mA per input
Reading and writing of the inputs:
Once per ms (average value)
val e)
LOW@HIGH edge
LOW
LOW:
HIGH:
G
0 +4 V
+13
3 +30
30 V
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
-
Output
p current:
M 50 mA
Max.
A per output
t t
(external resistance at least 480
at 24 V)
Updating of the outputs:
o tp ts:
Once per ms
Tip!
To change the jumper, remove plug-on module, if necessary.
9300POSBA1098
4-21
Installation
4.2.8.3
Connecting diagrams
Connection of analog signals
Analog signals are connected via the 2 x 4-pole terminal block X6.
Depending on the use of the analog inputs, the jumper of X3 must be set
accordingly.
100k
100k
Connection for external voltage supply

STOP!
- The maximum permitted voltage difference between an external
voltage source and theGND1 (terminal X6/7) of the controller is
10 V (common mode).
- The maximum permitted voltage difference between GND1
(terminal X6/7) and the PE of the controller is 50.
93XX
100k
100k
242R
X3
GND1
GND1 U
3,3nF
2
X6
62
63
GND1
=
+
242R
93XX
100k
100k
X6
GND1
Limit the voltage difference:

- By overvoltage clamping components or
- By direct connection of terminal(s) X6/2, X6/4 and PE
(see diagram).
3,3nF
X6
=
+
Connection for internal voltage supply
100k
100k
Configuration of the internal voltage supply:

- Set a freely assignable analog output (AOUTx) to HIGH level.
- E.g. terminal X6/63: Assign C0436 with FIXED100 %. 10 V are
thus applied across terminal X6/63.
93XX
Tip!
For this application, you may use one of the predefined
configurations in C0005. The output is assigned automatically
with FIXED100 % (corresponds to 10 at output X6/63) by
C0005 = XX1X (e.g. 1010 for speed control via terminals).
100k
100k
242R
X3
GND1
GND1 U
10k
X6
4-22
9300POSBA1098
10k
3,3nF
X6
62
63
GND1
Installation
Connection of digital signals

Digital signals are connected via the 2 x 7-pole terminal block X5.
The levels of the digital inputs and outputs are PLC compatible.
Only use relays with low-current contacts for the switching of the signal cables
(recommendation: relays with gold-plated contacts).
Connection for external voltage supply
G
N D
2
2 4 V
_
9 3 X X
5 0 m A
5 0 m A
5 0 m A
3 k
3 k
3 k
3 k
3 k
1 0 R
5 0 m A
X 5
3 k
3 k
2 2 k
A 1
A 2
A 3
A 4
P r o c e s s o r
b o a r d
G
2 8
E 1
E 2
E 3
E 4
3 9
E 5
N D
5 9
_
=
Y
D
R
P F 0 1
P F O
A N U E L
T R IP - R E S E T
P R G - R E S E T
M
T O
P R G
U C H - P R O
B E
- S T A R T
P O S
P O S -L IM
N E G
R F R
IN -T A R G E T
+
2 4 V
The external voltage source supplies the digital inputs and

outputs.
- If the external supply voltage is also to be used as an alternative
supply of the control electronics (backup operation in case of
mains failure):
- For this, make the connection illustrated as a broken line.
- The external voltage source must be able to drive a current
> 1 A.
This ensures that all actual values, even after mains
disconnection, are still detected and processed.
- Connection of the external voltage source:
- supply voltage at X5/59
- external ground at X5/39
STOP!
The maximum permitted voltage difference between GND2
(terminal X5/39) and the PE of the controller is 50.
Limit the voltage difference:
- By overvoltage clamping components or
- By a direct PE connection of terminal 39 (see figure).
93XX
A1 A2
E5 39
_
=
+
Connection for internal voltage supply

N D
2
2 4 V
_
=
9 3 X X
5 0 m A
5 0 m A
5 0 m A
5 0 m A
3 k
3 k
3 k
3 k
3 k
1 0 R
A 1
A 2
A 3
A 4
P r o c e s s o r
b o a r d
N D
5 9
P F 0 1
F IX E D 1
IN -T A R G E T
3 9
A N U E L
T R IP - R E S E T
P R G - R E S E T
E 5
U C H - P R O
B E
E 4
Tip!
For this application, you may use one of the predefined
configurations in C0005. The output is assigned automatically
with FIXED1 (corresponds to 24 V at terminal X5/A1) by
C0005 = XX1X (e.g. 20010 for absolute positioning; limited
positioning range).
T O
- S T A R T
E 3
P R G
P O S
E 2
P O S -L IM
E 1
N E G
G
2 8
R F R
X 5
3 k
3 k
2 2 k
Configuration of the internal voltage supply:

- Set a freely assignable digital output (DIGOUTx) to HIGH level.
- For instance terminal X5/A1: Assign C0117/1 with FIXED1.
24 V are thus applied across terminal X5/A1.
9300POSBA1098
4-23
Installation
Digital frequency input (X9) / Digital frequency output (X10)
Tip!
For the connection to the digital frequency input (X9) or digital frequency output
(X10), use prefabricated Lenze cables.Otherwise, only use cables with twisted
pairs and screened wires (A, A / B, B / Z, Z ) (see connection diagram).
'LJLWDO IUHTXHQF\ RXWSXW ;

Features:
- Sub-D female connector, 9-pole
- Output frequency: 0 - 500 kHz
- Current load per channel: max. 20 mA
- Two-track with inverse 5 V signals and zero track
- X10 has a different basic setting depending on the selected
configuration (C0005)
- Default setting:
Encoder simulation of the resolver signal
- Load capacity:
- For parallel connection, a maximum of three slaves can be
connected.
- For series connection any number of slaves can be
connected.
- When PIN 8 (EN) shows a LOW level, the master is initialized
(e.g. if the mains was disconnected). The slave can thus
monitor the master.
M
a s te r
S la v e
X 9
X 1 0
m m
0 .1 4
G N D
G N D
e n a b le
9
C
a b le
le n g t h
a x . 5 0
9 p o le S u b - D c o n n e c to r
9300POSBA1098
4
5
+ 5 V GND
9
m
A W G
F o r C
2 6
r o ta t io n
L a m p
c o n tro l
Pin assignment X10

1
2
3
6.5
A
A
4-24
'LJLWDO IUHTXHQF\ LQSXW ;

Features:
- Sub-D male connector, 9-pole
- Input frequency: 0 - 500 kHz
- Current consumption per channel: Max. 6 mA
- Two-track with inverse 5 V signals and zero track
- Possible input signals:
- Incremental encoder with two 5 V complementary signals
shifted by 90 (TTL encoder)
- Encoder simulation of the master
- PIN 8 serves to monitor the cable or the connected controller:
- When this PIN shows a LOW level, the SD3 monitoring
responds.
- If the monitoring is not required, this input can be connected
to + 5 V.
- The input is disconnected at C0540 = 0, 1, 2 or 3.
0 .5
2 0
0 .1 4
2 6
0 .5
2 0
0 .1 4
2 6
B
B
Z
Z
9 p o le S u b - D m a le c o n n e c to r
6
Z
7
Z
8
EN
Pin assignment X9
9
1
2
3
6.5 6.5
A
A
4
5
+5 V GND
6
Z
7
Z
8
LC
9
B
Installation
State bus (X5/ST)

The state bus is a controller-specific bus system for simple monitoring in a network
of drives:
- Controls all networked drives in a preselected state (see systems manual).
- Up to 20 controllers can be connected.
- Connection of the state bus cables to terminals X5/ST.
Stop!
Do not apply an external voltage across terminals X5/ST.
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
OFF
K1
F1
F1
Z1
F1
Z1
Z1
ON
K1
F2
L1
L3
L2
PE
F3
F2
L1
+UG -UG
93XX - 93XX
PE
ST 39 ST
PE
28
L2
L3
PE
+UG
F3
F2
-UG
L1
93XX - 93XX
A4
PE
ST 39 ST
PE
28
L2
L3
PE
+UG
F3
-UG
93XX - 93XX
A4
PE
ST 39 ST
PE
K1
K1
K1
RFR
RFR
RFR
28
A4
K35.0122
Fig. 4-12
Monitoring of a network of drives with the state bus

Z1
Mains filter
F1...F5
Fuses (see chapter 3.3.4 and 4.2.7.1)
K1
Main contactor
Tip!
For further information on the state bus as well as possible applications and
commissioning please consult the systems manual.
9300POSBA1098
4-25
Installation
System bus connection (X4)

K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
OFF
K1
F1 F2 F3
F1 F2 F3
Z1
F1
Z1
F2 F3
Z1
ON
K1
L1
L3
L2
PE
L1
+UG -UG
932X - 933X
PE
LO GND PE
HI
28
L2
L3
PE
+UG
-UG
L1
932X - 933X
A4
PE
HI LO GND
PE
28
L2
L3
PE
+UG
-UG
932X - 933X
PE
A4
HI
LO GND PE 28
A4
RA2
RA1
K1
K1
K1
RFR
RFR
RFR
K35.0123
Fig. 4-13
Wiring of the system bus

RA1, RA2
Bus terminating resistors 120 W (included in the accessory kit)
- Connection via pluggable screw terminals (double terminals can be used).

- Only connect terminals of the same designation.
- Features of the signal cable:
Total cable
length
up to 300 m
300 m to 1000 m
Cable type
LIYCY 2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2

twisted-pair with screening
Pair 1: CAN-LOW (LO) and CAN-HIGH (HI)
Pair 2: 2*GND
40 /km
130 nF/km
CYPIMF 2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2

twisted-pair with screening
Pair 1: CAN-LOW (LO) and CAN-HIGH (HI)
Pair 2: 2*GND
40 /km
60 nF/km
Cable resistance
Capacitance per
unit length
- Connection of the bus terminating resistors:

- One resistor 120 W each on the first and last bus device.
- On the 93XX controller the resistor can be screwed directly under the
terminals X4/HI and X4/LO.
4-26
9300POSBA1098
Installation
Features:
- CAN-based with bus protocol according to CANopen
(CAL-based Communication Profile DS301)
- Bus expansion:
- 25 m for max. 1 Mbit/s baud rate
- Up to 1 km with reduced baud rate
- Very reliable data transmission (Hamming distance = 6)
- Signal level according to ISO 11898
- Up to 63 bus devices are possible
- Access to all Lenze parameters
- Master functions are integrated into the controller:
- Data exchange possible between controllers without participation of a
master system (current ratio control, speed synchronization, etc.)
The following connections of the system bus connection are possible:
- Connection to a decentral terminal extension for digital and analog inputs
and outputs
- Connection to a superimposed control (PLC, position control, operating
terminal)
- Connection between several controllers
Tip!
For further information on the system bus as well as possible applications and
commissioning please consult the systems manual
Automation interface (X1)

The automation interface (X1) is used for the connection of different plug-on
modules
- Operating module
- Fieldbus modules
- RS232, RS485, fibre optics, type 2102 (LECOM-A/B/LI),
- INTERBUS, type 2111
- PROFIBUS, type 2131
9300POSBA1098
4-27
Installation
4.2.9
Motor temperature monitoring
Selection of the
sensor type
- Thermal sensor KTY
- Linear thermal sensor in the motor winding (standard for Lenze motors MDXKX and MDXQX)
- PTC thermistor
- PTC thermistor with defined tripping temperature (acc. to DIN 44081 and DIN 44082)
- Thermal contact TKO
Other monitoring
- Thermostat/normally-closed contact
KTY, PTC and TKO do not offer a complete protection.To improve the monitoring, Lenze recommends the
use of a bimetallic relay.
Alternative monitoring Comparators (CMP1 ... CMP3) monitor and a time element (TRANS1 ... TRANS4) limits the motor current
for small speeds or motor standstill.
You can also achieve this function by connecting suitable function blocks (see systems manual).
Reactions
different, depending on the type of temperature monitoring (see chapter 7.2).
Stop!
Do not connect an external voltage to the inputs.
Lenze motors
Connection
Fault
indication
Possible
reactions
ti
Point of
release
Notes
4-28
Motors of other brands
MDXKX and MDXQX
With
thermal contact
With sensor for continuous

temperature detection
- Resolver input X7:
Terminals T1/T2 next

to the terminals
U, V, W
- Resolver input X7:
- Pin X7/8 = PTC+,

Pin X7/9 = PTC- Encoder input X8:
- Pin X8/8 = PTC+,
Pin X8/5 = PTC(MONIT-)OH3 (MONIT-)OH7
(MONIT-)OH8
- Pin X7/8 = PTC+ ,

Pin X7/9 = PTC- Encoder input X8:
- Pin X8/8 = PTC+ ,
Pin X8/5 = PTC(MONIT-)OH3 (MONIT-)OH7
The corresponding monitoring and thus the following codes are preset under C0086.
- Warning
- TRIP (C0585 = 0)
- TRIP
- Warning
(C0583 = 0)
(C0584 = 2) - Warning
(C0583 = 0)
(C0584 = 2)
- OFF
- OFF
- OFF
- OFF
(C0585 = 2)
(C0583 = 3)
(C0584 = 3) - OFF (C0585 = 3)
(C0583 = 3)
(C0584 = 3)
- TRIP
fixed at 150 C can be set

fixed, (depending on
45 C ... 150 C the PTC/thermal
(C0121)
contact):
PTC: at RJ > 1600 W
- Monitoring is active in the
- Deactivate
default setting.
monitoring via X7 or
- If resolver (X7) and encoder (X8) X8 under C0583=3
and C0584= 3
are operated together:
- The connection is
- Connect PTC only at one
done according to
connector (X7 or X8).
DIN 44081 (see
- Do not connect PTC
also Fig. 4-14).
connection of the other
connector.
- For further information on the
connection of the thermal
sensor, please consult the
description of the feedback
system.
9300POSBA1098
With thermal
contact or PTC
according to DIN
44081/44082
Terminals T1/T2 next
to the terminals
U, V, W
(MONIT-)OH8
- TRIP (C0585 = 0)
- Warning
(C0585 = 2)
- OFF (C0585 = 3)
fixed at 150 C can be set

fixed, (depending on
45 C ... 150 C the PTC/thermal
(C0121)
contact):
PTC: at RJ > 1600W
- We recommend a Ziehl PTC (up - Deactivate
to 150 C):
monitoring via X7 or
X8 under
K15301075 or a thermostat.
C0583 = 3 and
- Enter characteristic (see
C0584 = 3
chapter 4.2.9.1)
- Deactivate monitoring via X7 or - The connection is
done according to
X8 under C0583 = 3 and
DIN 44081 (see
C0584 = 3
also Fig. 4-14).
Installation
Types 9321 to 9326
Types 9327 and 9330
Internal connection
24 V
7,4k
X10
3,3k
MONIT-OH8
T1
PE
T1 T2
PE
T1
2,7k
T2
U V W
X6 7
T2
93xx
Types 9330 and 9331
K350052
Type 9332
PE
PE
T1
T1
T2
T2
Fig. 4-14
Connection of a thermal sensor to the terminals T1 and T2 and internal connection
Tip!
- In den prefabricated Lenze system cables for Lenze servo motors the
cable for the temperature feedback is already included. The cables are
designed for wiring according to EMC.
- If you use cables of your own:
- Always lay cables separately from motor cables.
9300POSBA1098
4-29
Installation
4.2.9.1
R
User-specific characteristic for a PTC thermistor

Code Subcode
C1190 0
(Operating
mode 1)
1
(Operating
mode 2)
[O h m ]
a
R 2
(C 1 1 9 2 /2 )
R 1
(C 1 1 9 2 /1 )
T 1
(C 1 1 9 1 /1 )
T 2
(C 1 1 9 1 /2 )
T [ C ]
C1191 1 (100 C)
2 (150 C)
C1192 1 (1670 W)
2 (2225 W)
Description
Evaluation of the Lenze standard motor
temperature sensor
Evaluation of a user-specific thermal sensor. The
operating level is approximately in the linear range
(a) of the sensor characteristic. The operating level
is defined by two interpolation points.
Definition of the temperature points which are
assigned to the resistance values of the sensor.
Definition sensor resistance values
val es
Example of a sensor characteristic for continuous

temperature detection
4.2.10
Feedback systems
Different feedback systems can be connected to the controller:
- Resolver feedback (default setting)
- Encoder feedback:
- Incremental encoder TTL
- Sine-cosine encoder
- Sine cosine encoder with serial communication (single turn)
- Sine cosine encoder with serial communication (multi turn)
Resolver signal or encoder signal can be output at the digital frequency output X10
for slaves.
- Connection as shown in the figures:
- Use twisted pair cables and screened pair cables.
- Connect the screen at both ends.
- Use indicated cable cross-sections.
- The feedback system is activated under C0025.
Sensorless control SSC
Do not use sensorless control (SSC) for new applications (C0025 = 1).
Use a vector control EVF 9300 instead or contact Lenze.
4-30
9300POSBA1098
Installation
Resolver connection (X7)

- In all configurations predefined under C0005, a resolver can be used as
feedback system. An adjustment is not necessary.
Tip!
Use the prefabricated Lenze system cables for the resolver connection.
Features:
- 2-pin resolver (U = 10 V, f = 4 kHz)
- Resolver and resolver cable are monitored for open circuit (fault indication
Sd2)
X 7
C a b le le n g th m a x . 5 0 m
R e s o lv e r
m m
+ R E F
-R E F
A W G
0 .5
2 0
0 .1 4
2 6
3
+ C O S
-C O S
+ S IN
-S IN
+ P T C
-P T C
P T C
9 p o le S u b - D fe m a le c o n n e c to r
Fig. 4-15
Resolver connection
Assignment of the female connector (X7)

Pin
1
2
3
Signal
+ Ref
-Ref
GND
4
+ COS
5
-COS
6
+SIN
7
-SIN
8
+PTC
9
-PTC
X7/8 and X7/9 see chapter 4.2.9.
9300POSBA1098
4-31
Installation
Encoder connection (X8)

An incremental encoder or a sine-cosine encoder can be connected to this input.
Tip!
Use the prefabricated Lenze system cables for the encoder connection.
- Under C0421, you can set the encoder supply voltage VCC5_E from 5 V to
8 V:
- To set the encoder supply
- To compensate the voltage drop on the encoder if necessary
DU 2 x cable length x resistance/m x Iencoder
Stop!
Observe the connection voltage of the encoder system used. An excessive setting
under C0421 can destroy the encoder.
C a b le le n g th m a x . 5 0 m
R e fS IN
m m
0 .1 4
A
V
1 .0
5
Z
+ K T Y
-K T Y
-K T Y
C O S
2 6
1 7
F o r C
6
7
8
0 .1 4
2 6
B
B
Z
9 p o le S u b - D m a le c o n n e c to r
Fig. 4-16
4-32
9300POSBA1098
Encoder connection
= 2 ,5 V
0 ,5 V
A W G
+ K T Y
R e fS IN
R e fC O S
G N D
Z / + 4 8 5
C C 5 _ E
Z / - 4 8 5
K T Y
C O S
E n c o d e r
R e fC O S
G N D
S IN
S IN
V c c
X 8
0 ,5 V
r o ta t io n
= 2 ,5 V
Installation
Incremental encoder
Features:
- Incremental encoders with two 5 V complementary signals which are shifted
by 90 (TTL encoder) can be connected.
- The zero track can be connected (as option).
- 9-pole Sub-D female connector
- Input frequency: 0 - 500 kHz
- Current consumption per channel: 6 mA
Assignment of the male connector (X8)
Pin
1
2
3
Signal
B
A
A
4
V CC5_E
5
GND (-PTC)
6
Z
7
Z
8
+PTC
9
B
X8/8 see chapter 4.2.9.
Sine-cosine encoder
Features:
- The following encoders can be connected
- Simple sine-cosine encoders with rated voltage 5 V to 8 V.
- Sine-cosine encoder with a communication interface type Stegmann
SCS/M70xxx
(The initialization time of the controller is increased to approx. 2 seconds).
- 9-pole Sub-D female connector
- Internal resistance Ri = 221 W
- Voltage sine and cosine track: 1 Vpp p0.2 V
- Voltage RefSIN and RefCOS: +2.5 V
Tip!
For encoder with tracks: sine, sine and cosine, cosine:
Assign RefSIN with sine and RefCOS with cosine.
Assignment of the male connector (X8)

Pin
1
2
3
4
Signal
SIN
RefCOS COS
V CC5_E
5
GND (-PTC)
6
Z or -RS485
7
Z or +RS485
8
+PTC
9
RefSIN
X8/8 see chapter 4.2.9.
9300POSBA1098
4-33
Installation
4.3
Installation of a CE-typical drive system
General
notes
- The electromagnetic compatibility of a machine depends on the type of installation and care taken. Please observe:
Assembly
Filters
4-34
- Assembly
- Filters
- Screening
- Grounding
For diverging installations, the conformity to the CE EMC Directive requires a check of the machine or system
regarding the EMC limit values. This is for instance valid for:
- The use of unscreened cables
- The use of group RFI filters instead of assigned RFI filters
- Operation without mains filter
The compliance of the machine application with the EMC Directive is in the responsibility of the user.
- If you observe the following measures, you can assume that the machine will operate without any EMC problems
caused by the drive system, and that compliance with the EMC Directive and the EMC law is achieved.
- If devices which do not comply with the CE requirement concerning noise immunity EN 50082-2 are operated
close to the controller, these devices may be disturbed electromagnetically by the controllers.
Connect controller, mains choke, and mains filter to the grounded mounting plate with a wire of large a crosssection as possible:
- Mounting plates with conductive surfaces (zinc-coated, stainless steel) allow permanent contact.
- Painted plates are not suitable for the installation in accordance to the EMC.
If you use several mounting plates:
- Connect as much surface as possible of the mounting plates (e.g. with copper bands).
Ensure the separation of motor cable and signal or mains cable.
Do not use the same terminal strip for mains input and motor output.
Cable guides as close as possible to the reference potential. Unguided cables have the same effect as aerials.
Use mains filters or RFI filters and mains chokes which are assigned to the controller:
- RFI filters reduce impermissible high-frequency interference to a permissible value.
- Mains chokes reduce low-frequency interferences which depend on the motor cable and its length.
- Mains filters combine the functions of mains choke and RFI filter.
9300POSBA1098
Installation
Screening
- Connect the screen of the motor cable to the controller:
Grounding
- To the screen connection of the controller.

- Additionally to the mounting plate with a surface as large as possible.
- Recommendation: For the connection, use ground clamps on bare metal mounting surfaces.
If contactors, motor-protecting switches or terminals are located in the motor cable:
- Connect the screens of the connected cables also to the mounting plate, with a surface as large as possible.
Connect the screen in the motor terminal box or on the motor housing to PE:
- Metal glands at the motor terminal box ensure a connection of the screen and the motor housing.
If the mains cable between mains filter and controller is longer than 300 mm:
- Screen mains cables.
- Connect the screen of the mains cable directly to the inverter and to the mains filter and connect it to the mounting plate with as large a surface as possible.
Use of a brake chopper:
- Connect the screen of the brake resistor cable directly to the mounting plate, at the brake chopper and the brake
resistor with as large a surface as possible.
- Connect the screen of the cable between controller and brake chopper directly to the mounting plate, at the inverter and the brake chopper with a surface as large as possible.
Screen the control cables:
- Connect both screen ends of the digital control cables.
- Connect one screen end of the analog control cables.
- Always connect the screens to the screen connection at the controller over the shortest possible distance.
Use of the controllers in residential areas:
- To limit the radio interference, use an additional screen damping 10 dB. This is usually achieved by installation
in enclosed and grounded control cabinets made of metal.
Ground all metallically conductive components (controller, mains filter, motor filter, mains choke) using suitable
cables connected to a central point (PE bar).
Maintain the minimum cross-sections prescribed in the safety regulations:
- For EMC, not the cable cross-section is important, but the surface and the contact with a cross-section as large
as possible, i.e. large surface.
9300POSBA1098
4-35
Installation
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1 ... F3
K1
OFF
Z1
K1
PES
L1
L2
ON
F4 F5
PE
L3
PES
PES
PES
+UG
-UG +UG
-UG
932X - 933X
PE
T1
T2
K1
RB
9351
U
PES
PE
X7
Z2
28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 A1 A2 A3 A4 59
PES
PES
PES
PES
-X1
K1
+
PES
PE
RFR
PE
3~
Fig. 4-17
F1...F5
K1
Z1
Z2
-X1
PES
4-36
7 62 63
9300POSBA1098
K35.0124
Example for an installation in accordance with the EMC regulations

Fuses (see chapter 3.3.4 and chapter 4.2.7.1)
Mains contactor
Mains filter A or B see Accessories
Brake module, see Accessories
Terminal strip in control cabinet
HF screen termination by large-surface PE connection
(see Screening in this chapter)
Commissioning
5
5.1
Commissioning
Before switching on
Prior to initial switch-on of the controller, check the wiring for completeness,
short-circuit, and earth fault:
- Power connection:
- Supply via terminals L1, L2 and L3 (direct mains connection) or alternatively
via terminals +UG, -UG (DC bus connection, network of drives).
- Motor connection:
- In-phase connection to the motor (direction of rotation)
- Feedback system (resolver, incremental encoder, )
- Control terminals:
- Controller enable: Terminal X5/28 (reference potential: X5/39)
- Cover of the power terminals:
- Put on cover(s) and fix.
- Keep to the switch-on sequence!
- All commissioning steps described in chapter 5 refer to the default setting.
5.2
Initial switch-on
Tip!
- Use a PC with the Lenze program Global Drive Control (GDC) under
Windows for commissioning. The convenient menu include the codes for the
most important settings.
- A fieldbus module type 2102 RS232, RS485, fibre optics (LECOM-A/B) is
required to run the GDC.
- GDC and fieldbus module are not included in the scope of supply of the
controller.
9300POSBA1098
5-1
Commissioning
Commissioning using an example
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F1...F3
Z1
L1 L2 L3
93XX
PE +UG -UG
Lenze
Global Drive
Control
Lenze
LECOM A/B
24V
+ -
59 39
RS485
71 72 88 89
RS232
X5
X7
PE
U V W
28
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5
39 A1 A2 A3 A4 59
RFR
S3
S5
S4
S2
S1
K35.0125
Fig. 5-1
Example of a drive control with default setting
Switch
S1
S2
S3
S4
Function
Limit switch for negative direction of positioning (system protection)
Limit switch for positive direction of positioning (system protection)
Start positioning program
Reference label for homing
Tip: Set E4 to HIGH if there is no homing mark.
Change-over from positioning to manual operation
S5
Positioning profile
v
v1
a1
v2
a2
a2
t1
a3
a4
v3
K35.0126
5-2
9300POSBA1098
Name
a1
v1
a2
v2
t1
a3
v3
a4
Function
Acceleration forwards
Positioning speed forwards
Deceleration forwards
Creeping for target approach
Waiting time (e.g. processing of a
workpiece)
Acceleration backwards
Positioning speed backwards
Deceleration backwards
Commissioning
The following table lists the procedure for commissioning of a positioning control
according to the example Fig. 5-1 .
A comprehensive description of the commissioning of position controls can be
obtained from the following chapters.
Section
Action
Detailed
description in
Switch on
controller
1.Assign terminal X5/28 (controller enable) to a LOW signal.

2.Assign terminal X5/E1 and X5/E2 to a HIGH signal (+ 13...+ 30 V).
3.Assign terminal X5/E3 to X5/E5 to a LOW signal.
4.Switch on mains:
- The controller is ready for operation after approx.1 s
(2 s for drives with sine-cosine encoder with serial interface).
Start GDC on the PC:
- Set the communication parameters for online operation in the Momentary drive dialog
box. Confirm with OK.
- Select the controller in the Assign controller description dialog box. Confirm with OK.
1.Adapt controller to the mains.
2.Adapt controller to the motor.
3.Enter machine parameters.
1.Enter parameters for manual positioning or use default setting.
2.Enable controller.
3.Function test with manual control.
1.Enter positioning data in the Programming dialog box.
2.Connect up the X5 terminals in the Terminal monitor 93XX (digital) menu
- When the digital terminals X5 are supplied with internal voltage;
Assign output X5/A1 with FIXED1. The output on terminal X5/A1 is approx. 24 V.
TIP!
For this application, you may use one of the predefined configurations in C0005.
C0005 = XXX1X (e.g. 20010 = absolute positioning with control via terminals) assigns
FIXED1 automatically to the output X5/A1.
1.Check whether the drive is ready for operation:
- When the green LED is flashing: Controller is ready for operation, go on with step 2.
- When green LED and red LED are flashing: Interference. Before proceeding with
commissioning eliminate the fault (see chapter 8 Troubleshooting and fault elimination).
2.Enable controller
- Green LED is illuminated when a HIGH signal (+13...+ 30 V) is assigned and no other
source of the controller inhibit is active.
3.For operation with a fieldbus module, additional settings are necessary (see Operating
Instructions of the fieldbus module).
The motor now rotates with the provided set-value and the selected direction of rotation.
Chapter 5.4
Switch on PC
Generate
parameter
t sett
Manual control
Enter
parameters for
positioning
profile
Control drive
Chapter 5.5
Chapter 5.6.1
Chapter 5.6.2
Chapter 5.6.3
Chapter 5.6.4
Chapter 5.6.5
Chapter 5.7
Chapter 5.8
Chapter 5.10
9300POSBA1098
5-3
Commissioning
5.3
Commissioning sequence
Switch on
controller
chapter 5.4
Switch on PC,
start GDC
chapter 5.5
yes
Load
parameter set
chapter 5.9
Parameter set
already generated?
A positioning task already used

is to be set up again
no
Generate
parameter set
chapter 5.6
Adapt controller to the

mains
chapter 5.6.1
Manual control
chapter 5.7
Adapt controller to the

motor
chapter 5.6.2
Enter machine
parameters
chapter 5.6.3
Manual control
chapter 5.7
Enter positioning profile

parameters
chapter 5.8.1.3
Manual homing
chapter 5.10.3
Program control
chapter 5.10.4
Fig. 5-2
5-4
9300POSBA1098
Commissioning sequence
A new positioning
is to be entered
Commissioning
5.4
Switch on controller
1. Assign LOW level to terminal X5/28 (controller enable).
2. Connect the positioning limit switch to terminals X5/E1 and X5/E2 (see
chapter 4.2.8).
Note:
If you do not use positioning limit switches, assign the terminals to HIGH
level.
3. Assign LOW level to terminals X5/E3 to X5/E5.
4. Switch on mains:
- The controller is ready for operation after approx.1 s
(2 s for drives with sine-cosine encoder with serial interface).
5. Check whether the drive is ready for operation:
- When the green LED is flashing: Controller is ready.
- When green LED and red LED are flashing: Interference occurred.
Before proceeding with the commissioning, eliminate the fault (see chapter
8 Troubleshooting and fault elimination).
6. For operation with a fieldbus module, additional settings are necessary
(see Operating Instructions of the corresponding fieldbus module).
9300POSBA1098
5-5
Commissioning
5.5
Switch on PC, start GDC

- Switch on PC.
- Start GDC program under Windows.
When GDC is in the online mode
- The Find LECOM-A/B drives dialog box is opened.
- Click on Find. GDC will now search for a controller.
- GDC selects the first controller found.
- GDC tests all baud rates which can be set.
- GDC loads the parameter set descriptions of the connected controller.
- If GDC does not find a parameter set description, you are asked which
description you want to load alternatively.
- GDC automatically reads the parameter set from the controller.
When GDC is in the offline mode
- You have to select the controller manually.
- You can change to online operation. GDC automatically selects a
controller.
- Open the Controller menu in the menu bar and click on Select. Make your
choice for:
- The desired parameter set description
- Baud rate
- Controller address
5-6
9300POSBA1098
Commissioning
5.6
Generate parameter set

Warning!
Do not change any controller settings which are not mentioned in this chapter. For
more complex positioning tasks consult the systems manual.
The instructions for the generation of a parameter set in this chapter are based on
the default setting.
Proceed systematically when generating a parameter set:
1. Adapt controller to the mains conditions.
2. Adapt controller to the motor.
3. Enter machine parameters.
4. Enter parameters for manual positioning.(Then carry out a function test.)
5. Enter parameters for positioning profile.
Tip!
Make a positioning profile of your positioning task and determine as many
positioning data as possible, using this drawing (see chapter 5.8.
9300POSBA1098
5-7
Commissioning
5.6.1
Adapt controller to the mains

Fig. 5-3
Field
1
5.6.2
Base settings dialog box

Command
Click on field.
Function
Select values for the actual mains and operating
conditions.
Adapt controller to the motor

To achieve an optimum speed-torque characteristic for the drive, it is necessary to
enter the nameplate data of the connected motor.
When you use a Lenze motor:
Field
2
3
4
Command
Click on field motor type (A)
Click on field encoder (B)
Click on field position polarity
Function
Select connected motor
Selected feedback system used
Select direction of rotation
For motors with a resolver, use the eight-digit designation of the motor nameplate
encoder (as an option).
- For this, change to the parameter menu (see button Fig. 5-4) and select the
motor/feedback system menu.
5-8
9300POSBA1098
Commissioning
Parameter menu
Motor/Feedback systems
Motor adjustment
Feedback systems
Fig. 5-4
How to find the menus Motor setting and Feedback systems
In Feedback systems menu:

Field
Command
Select C0416
Select C0003
Function
Resolver fault
Enter value of the motor nameplate
Save data (C0003 = 1)
If you use a motor other than from Lenze:

Change to the menu Motor setting (see Fig. 5-4).
In the menu Motor setting:
Field
Command
Select C0086
Select C0006
Select C0022
Select C0081
Select C0084
Function
Select a motor which best matches with the motor
used
A list of available motors can be obtained from
chapter 11.4.
Operating mode of the motor control
Adapt Imax to the maximum motor current
Rated motor power
Stator resistance of the motor (only for very high
demands on the control characteristics)
Select C0085
Leakage inductance of the motor (only for very

high demands on the control characteristics)
Select C0087
Select C0088
Select C0089
Select C0090
Select C0091
Select C0003
Rated motor speed

Rated motor current
Rated motor frequency
Rated motor voltage
Motor-cos j
Save data (C0003 = 1)
9300POSBA1098
5-9
Commissioning
5.6.3
Enter machine parameters

Fig. 5-5
5-10
Base settings dialog box
Field
1
Command
Click on field Gearbox numerator
Click on field Gearbox denominator
Click on field Feed constant
4
5
6
Click on field Speed (n-max)

Click on field Speed (v-max)
Click on field Acceleration (a-max)
Click on field QSP ramp
9300POSBA1098
Function
Enter numerator for the gearbox ratio
(important for the entry of the floating point)
Enter denominator for the gearbox ratio
(important for the entry of the floating point)
Enter feed of the spindle
(value of the machine data)
Enter upper speed limit of the motor
Enter fastest positioning speed of the machine
Maximum permissible acceleration
(with interference or during approach to position
limit switches a-max cannot be activated)
Time from release of fault or approach to a
position limit switch to machine standstill
Commissioning
5.6.4
Parameters for manual positioning

Stop!
Check the parameters for manual positioning. To check a configuration, select
small values for acceleration and speed (e.g. default setting).
The default setting of the parameters is sufficient for most applications. Enter the
settings as follows:
Fig. 5-6
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Menu Manual positioning in the parameter menu

Command
Select Basic settings dialog box
Click on Parameter menu button
Click on Positioning functions menu
Click on Manual positioning menu
Click on C1243
Enter new value
Click on C1252
Enter new value
Click on C0003
Click on Dialog control menu
Function
Open parameter menu
Open Positioning functions menu
Open Manual positioning menu
Manual speed
Default setting:
5 % of vmax
Manual acceleration
Default setting:
10 % of amax
Save settings
Open Control dialog box
9300POSBA1098
5-11
Commissioning
5.6.5
Controller enable
- The controller is only enabled when all sources of controller inhibit are reset.
- When the controller is enabled, the green LED on the controller is
illuminated.
- For the display of active sources of a controller inhibit see chapter 8.
The following table shows the conditions for the controller enable:
Source controller inhibit
Controller inhibited
Controller enabled
Note
Terminal X5/28
0 V +4 V
+13 V +30 V
Fault
In case of TRIP
In case of Message
TRIP reset
For checking see chapter 8
System bus (CAN)
Transmission of the control

information INHIBIT via C0135
Transmission of the control

information ENABLE via C0135
See systems manual
Fieldbus module
See Operating Instructions of the corresponding fieldbus module
Tip!
All sources of controller inhibit act like a series connection of switches,
independently of each other.
Stop!
When the internal control structure is changed, another terminal assignment may
result.
5-12
9300POSBA1098
Commissioning
5.7
Function test with manual control

Test the function with manual control after every new or modified configuration.
Warning!
Provide suitable emergency stops for manual operation so that you will be able to
stop the drive in the event of unpredictable movements.
Fig. 5-7
Dialog box Control
Field
3
5
Command
Select Manual operation
Function
Manual operation active
With drive diagnostics Ok, Enable is possible
(see also chapter 6.1.2)
4
2
Controller Enable
Select Manual positive
Enables the controller, if there is no interference

The drive moves in the positive direction towards
the limit switch:
- Test positioning limits
- Overide positioning limit switch to test its
function
The drive stops
Reset Manual positive
9300POSBA1098
5-13
Commissioning
Fig. 5-8
Field
1
1, 2
Dialog box Control

Command
Select Manual negative
Function
The drive positions in the negative direction
towards the limit switch:
- Test positioning limits
- Overide positioning limit switch to test its
function
Reset Manual negative
The drive stops
Manual positive and Manual negative selected The drive brakes with amax down to standstill.
Tip!
- To assign the reverse direction to the function Manual positive and Manual
negative, change to the dialog box Base settings and set the field
Position polarity to inverted.
- You can quit overridden limit switched only by changing the positioning
direction (Manual positive or Manual negative).
5-14
9300POSBA1098
Commissioning
5.8
Enter positioning profile parameters
5.8.1
Structure of a positioning program

- The positioning program consists of max. 32 program sets (PS).
- A PS is part of the positioning profile. It contains the actions up to the next
position target.
- The sequence of processing the PS within the positioning program can be
freely selected.
- The PS determine the sequence of the positioning. The functions within a PS
are processed according to a fixed sequence (see Fig. 5-13). These
functions include:
- Type of positioning (relative or absolute positioning with or without touch
probe)
- Speed profile of the positioning
- Access to data in the variable tables (VT)
- Reaction on external events via digital inputs (PFI)
- Output of control signals via digital outputs (PFO)
- The positioning is carried out according to the positioning profile parameters.
These parameters are lists in the variable tables (VT). The following VTs are
available:
- VTPOS for the target position
- VTVEL for the positioning speed and final speed
- VTACC for the acceleration and deceleration
- VTPCS for the number of pieces or repeat function
- VTTIME for the waiting time
9300POSBA1098
5-15
Commissioning
5.8.1.1
Tools for editing

For a simple and fast input of parameter data, GDC provides tools for editing. These
are explained in the PS templates displayed in the program.

Fig. 5-9
5-16
Editing tools for the program sets
Field
1, 3
Function
Selection of a PS
2
4
Browsing the PS
Insert PS
5
6
7, 10, 11,
12
Delete PS
Reset PS
Write comments on the PS
8
9
Print PS
Select dialog box Control
9300POSBA1098
Description
Click on Go to ... (3)
The dialog box (1) is opened. Select a PS which you want to modify. At
the same time you can write notes about the PS. For this, click on
Documentation (13) (see also 7).
Select the previous or next PS or jump to the first or last PS
Inserts a new PS at this place and displaces all following PS by one
position
The last PS is deleted.
Deletes the current PS and displaces all following PS by one position
Resets all parameters of the current PS to default setting
Documentation of current PS
In the dialog box (10) you can enter a name for the PS (12) and add an
explanatory text as comment (11).
Output of the current or all PS to a printer
Direct change to the dialog box Control, e.g. to test modifications in
manual operation (see chapter 5.7)
Commissioning
5.8.1.2
Structure of a positioning profile

- Make a positioning profile of your drive task (e.g. Fig. 5-10, Fig. 5-11).
- For more complex positioning profiles, generate the positioning program with
several PS (e.g. for different positioning speeds).
v
t
PS 01
PS 02
PS 03
K35.0127
Fig. 5-10
Structure of a positioning profile (example of a point-to-point positioning)
In the example, a total of three program sets are required for the complete input of
all parameters. Every PS uses the same input template. The input template is
described in the next chapter.
Program sets
The parameter data for the positioning profile are saved in program sets.
- Thanks to the template of the program sets:
- The sequence of the input is determined (see 5.8.1.3)
- Complex positionings are divided into individual sections (sets)
- Every program set can be called up again and again without further
programming.
- A total of 32 program sets are available.
9300POSBA1098
5-17
Commissioning
V T A C C
V T V E L
V T V E L
V T A C C
S ta r t p o s itio n
V T V E L
V T A C C
VTACC
V T A C C
E n d p o s itio n
a 1
v 1
a 2
a 1
v 2
a 3
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
t7
t w a it
V T P 0 S 0 1
t8
t9
V T V P TO P S O 0 S 3 0 3
V T P O S 0 2
a 4
a 5
v 3
K35.0128
Fig. 5-11
Name
a1
t1
v1
t2
a2
t3
v2
t4
a3
t5
t6
a4
t7
v3
t8
a5
t9
5-18
9300POSBA1098
Structure of a positioning profile (example of a point-to-point positioning)

Program set (PS)
PS01
PS01
PS01
PS01
PS01
PS01
PS01, PS02
PS02
PS02
PS02
PS03
PS03
PS03
PS03
PS03
PS03
PS03
Function
Acceleration forwards
Time until v1 is reached
Positioning speed forwards
Calculated time of braking to reach v2 in t3
Deceleration 1 forwards
Start creeping with v2
Final speed (PS01), positioning speed (PS02)
Drive approaches position
Deceleration 2 forwards
Position reached, then waiting time (e.g. processing of a workpiece)
Start backward motion
Acceleration backwards
Time until v3 is reached
Positioning speed backwards
Time until a5 starts (calculated)
Deceleration backwards
Time until the start is reached again
Commissioning
Description of the input template

Click on the Programming button in the Base settings dialog box.

Fig. 5-12
Dialog box for entering the positioning data
Field
1
Function
Description
Dialog box for a program set All necessary positioning profile parameters for a PS are entered as well
(PS)
as possible branches to further PS.
2, 3
4, 5, 6
Parameter field
Selection field
6
7
8
Dialog box
Input field
Comment on the parameter
Click on field. A dialog box (3) for selecting a parameter is opened.

A parameter is selected. Click on desired parameter. For variable tables
(VT) you can describe the table items. For this, click on Input (5). A
dialog box (6) for entering a parameter is opened.
Dialog box for entering a parameter in the variable table
Input of the desired parameter
You can write a comment to the parameter, e.g. for which function it is
required.
9300POSBA1098
5-19
Commissioning
Processing a program set

The following chart shows the processing of a program set (PS).
1
Wait
active?
yes
Input signal (PFI)

released?
yes
no
Switching
active?
no
yes
PS-Mode
active?
no
yes
Switching
active?
yes
Is output PFO xx Switching before pos. set?

yes
Select
mode
Positioning completed?
yes
Branch 1
active?
no
yes
Branch 2
active?
no
yes
Piece
number
active ?
no
yes
Jump
to PS?
yes
VTTIME No. xx
elapsed?
yes
9300POSBA1098
Input signal (PFI)

released?
no
yes
In the field Jump to

select PS
Input signal (PFI)

released?
no
yes

select PS
VTPCS No. xx
reached?
yes
no

select PS

select PS
Program end
5-20
If PS-CANCEL or no TP select
PS (jump to)
Is output PFO xx Switching after

pos. set?
yes
no
Fig. 5-13
no
yes
no
Waiting time
active?
no
no
Processing a program set
Commissioning
5.8.1.3
Enter parameters

Fig. 5-14
Dialog box for entering the positioning data
Field
1
Function
Inactive or No. of a PFI
(0 level or 1 level)
Inactive or No. of a PFO

3
4
5
Type of positioning
Position target of VTPOS
Positioning speed from
VTVEL
6
7
8
9
10@20
Acceleration from VTACC

Deceleration from VTACC
Final speed from VTVEL
TP window from VTPOS
TP residual distance from
VTPOS
11
Inactive or No. of a PFO

12
Inactive or time from

VTTIME
13@19 Inactive or No. of a PFI

14@18 Inactive or no. of a PFI
15@17 Inactive or number from
VTPCS
16
Jump to the next PS or

program end
Description
Program function input (PFI)
A digital input signal via an FB or terminal initiates the processing of the PS.
Program function output (PFO)
A digital output signal indicates the state via an FB or via terminal.
E.g. absolute positioning, relative positioning or special function (set reference)
Input of a position target from the variable table VTPOS
Input of a speed from the variable table VTVEL
Input of an acceleration from the variable table VTACC
Input of a deceleration from the variable table VTACC
Input of a speed from the variable table VIVEL or standstill
Input of a position value from the variable table VTPOS
Input of a position value from the variable table VTPOS
If there is no touch probe during a touch probe positioning, the program
branches/jumps (if PS CANCEL or no TP) to a PS or program end.
Program function output (PFO)
A digital output signal indicates the state via an FB or via terminal.
Input of a waiting time from the variable table VTTIME until the next program
function is processed
Program function input (PFI). If a digital input signal is applied during a request
(via a FB or a terminal), the program branches (Jump to) to a PS or to the
program end.
Program function input (PFI)
If a digital input signal is applied during a request (via a FB or a terminal), the
program branches (Jump to) to a PS or to the program end.
Input of a set piece number from the variable table VTPCS
As long as the set piece number is not reached, the program branches to a PS
or to the program end.
Input of a PS or program end to which the program branches after the current
PS has been processed
9300POSBA1098
5-21
Commissioning
5.8.2
Save parameter set

The operating menu in GDC (see Fig. 5-15) allows you to save a new or modified
parameter set:
- Saving on the hard disk of the PC or a diskette by
Write all parameter sets to file
- Saving in the controller by
Write current parameter set to drive (F5)
- You can save the data as non-volatile with C0003 = 1 in the Parameter set
management menu.
Tip!
You can enter comments for the parameter set when saving on the hard disk or
diskette.
1. Click on Drive parameters in the menu bar of GDC.
Fig. 5-15
Dialog box Write parameter set to file
2. Select Write all parameter sets to file.

3. Enter the file names and select the disk drive on which you want to save
the parameter set.
4. Write a comment on the parameter set in the Commentary field and
confirm with OK.
5-22
9300POSBA1098
Commissioning
5.9
Load parameter set
5.9.1
Load parameter set from the PC

The operating menu (Fig. 5-16) allows the loading of a parameter set:
- From the hard disk of the PC or a diskette in GDC by
Read all parameter sets from file
- From the PC to the controller by
Write current parameter set to drive (F5)
Warning!
- The controller is re-initialized by the parameter set transfer from the PC to the
controller:
- System configurations and terminal assignments may be modified. Make
sure that your wiring and drive configuration match with the settings of the
parameter set.
- Use terminal X5/28 or the GDC STOP function as the source for controller
inhibit. A parameter set transfer is only possible with controller inhibit.
1. Insert a diskette with the parameter set into the disk drive of the PC. Click
on Drive parameters in the menu bar of GDC.
Fig. 5-16
Dialog box Read all parameter sets from file
9300POSBA1098
5-23
Commissioning
2. Select Read all parameter sets from file.

3. Select the disk drive and the parameter set which is to be loaded.
Confirm with OK.
4. Make sure that your wiring and drive configuration match the settings of
the new parameter set.
5.9.2
Load parameter set from the controller

The operating menu (Fig. 5-16) allows the loading of a parameter set:
- From the controller to the PC by
Read current parameter set from the controller (F7)
- C0002 offers the following options in the menu Parameter set
management:
1. Loading of the factory setting (C0002 = 0)
2. Loading of your specific parameter set (C0002 = 1)
Tip!
When the parameter set is loaded, the RDY message is not displayed, since the
controller cannot be operated during this time.
5-24
9300POSBA1098
Commissioning
5.10
Control drive
5.10.1
Description of the dialog box

- Click on the Control button in the Base settings dialog box.
Fig. 5-17
Dialog box Control
Field
1
2
3
4
Function
Manual control
Manual homing
Menu Diagnostics
Enable, Inhibit controller and
drive diagnostics
Description
See chapter 5.7
See chapter 5.10.3
See chapter 6.1.2
See chapter 5.6.5, chapter 5.7, chapter 5.10.3 and chapter 5.10.4
5
6
Status display
Program control
Important values for program control (see chapter 5.10.4)

See chapter 5.10.4
9300POSBA1098
5-25
Commissioning
5.10.2
Parameters for homing
Fig. 5-18
Menu Homing in the parameter menu
The factory setting of the parameters is sufficient for most applications. Enter the
settings as follows:
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5-26
9300POSBA1098
Command
Select Basic settings dialog box
Click on Parameter menu button
Click on Positioning functions menu
Click on Homing menu
Click on C1242
Enter new value
Click on C1251
Enter new value
Click on C1213
Select positioning direction
Function
Click on C0003
Click on Dialog control menu
Save settings
Open Control dialog box
Open parameter menu

Open Positioning functions menu
Open Homing menu
Homing speed
Default setting:
5 % of vmax
Homing acceleration
Default setting:
10 % of amax
Homing mode
Default setting:
+home
- The drive moves in the positive direction
towards the limit switch.
switch
Setting:
-home
- The drive positions in the negative direction
towards the limit switch.
Commissioning
5.10.3
Manual homing
The controller can perform all positioning tasks only with a defined reference point
(zero point).
- Click on the Control button in the Base settings dialog box.

Fig. 5-19
Dialog box Control
Field
1
5
Command
Select Manual operation
Function
Manual operation active
With drive diagnostics Ok, Enable is possible
(see also chapter 6.1.2)
4
2
Controller Enable
Select Manual homing

The drive uses the reference parameters for
positioning (see chapter 5.10.2)
The drive stops
The drive positions until the next zero position of
the rotor and brakes to standstill
This position is now defined to be the reference
point for all position values.
Status display
Reference Ok is displayed after successful
reference homing
Terminal X5/A4 = HIGH
Reset Manual homing

Override the reference switch
9300POSBA1098
5-27
Commissioning
5.10.4
Program control

Fig. 5-20
Dialog box Control
Field
Command
Activate program operation
1
4
Reset Manual operation
2
8
Controller Enable
Select Program start
Reset Program start and select again
5
7
5-28
Select Program stop

Reset Program stop
Select Program reset
Reset Program reset
9300POSBA1098
Function
For factory setting
- Switch terminal X5/E5 = HIGH
Manual operation switched off
With drive diagnostics Ok, Enable is possible (see also
chapter 6.1.2)
The drive moves according to the loaded positioning
profile
The program restarts, or is continued after an interrupt
(Program stop)
Display of the current position and the current program
state
The program interrupts, the drive stops
The program can be continued with Program start
The program interrupts, the drive stops
Resets the piece counter and all PFO (see also chapter
5.8).
Loads the first PS with which the program is to start
The program can be restarted with Program start.
Commissioning
5.11
Automatic control parameter identification

The function Automatic control parameter identification initiates:
- An identification of the mechanical system parameters by a brief movement
and
- An automatic, optimum setting of the speed and position controller thanks to
the identified or set parameters.
Stop!
- The parameters can be identified only, if no external torques act on the drive.
In the event of an overhauling load etc., it is not permitted to activate a
movement by this function!
- Release the brake (if any) before this function is executed.
- To keep the number of revolutions:
- A brake resistor or a mains feedback unit
and
- A constant inertia are necessary.
- If the codes C1182 to C1185 differ extremely from the default settings, the
identification of the system parameters and thus the controller setting may
differ.
- This means that the movement to be executed by the function must be set
such that the slowest moving element of the drive system still moves
significantly.
9300POSBA1098
5-29
Commissioning
5.11.1
Procedure
A c t iv a t in g
m o d e = 1 , 2 , 3
M o d e = 1 ?
P re p a re
m o v e m e n t
n o
R S P = 0 ?
y e s
S t iu m la t e
m o v e m e n t
n o
A c c e p t m e a s u re d
v a lu e s
R S P = 1 ?
y e s
C a lc u la t e
s y s te m
p a ra m e te rs
n o
C a lu la t e
c o n tro l
p a ra m te rs
M o d e = 2 ?
y e s
C o m p le t e d
The function is activated by mode (C1180). To activate this function, the controller
must be inhibited and the drive must not rotate. Otherwise, the function is not
executed and the status (C1181)is set with an error code. If the function is activated
again, the fault is reset, the system is re-initialized and thefunction is restarted. If you
enter 0 for mode, the function is reset to its initial state.
Calculate control parameters (Mode = 1)
When this function is activated, the control parameters are calculated only.
Identification / Identification and calculation of control parameters
(Mode = 2/3)
If the function Identification or Identification and calculation of control
parameters is activated, a movement of the drive is provoked. For this, the
controller inhibit (RSP)must be reset after activating the function and themovement
must thus be enabled. After the movement, set controller inhibit again to complete
the function.
5-30
9300POSBA1098
Commissioning
Fig. 5-21
5.11.2
Dialog box Control parameter identification
Causes of faults and remedy

If a fault occurs during the parameter identification, the cause of the fault can be
determined using the status (C1181).
Status
(C1181)
Cause
Remedy
Calculation of the control parameter not

possible
Check whether the parameters are still in a reasonable

range (C1187/C1188).
Too few scanning points found
Reference torque too small
Speed 0 during the start

Controller inhibit set during movement
Minimum brake torque not reached
Torque ramp too flat or maximum torque
too small
Timeout
Blocking
Change marginal conditions of the drive (C1182-C1185),

i.e. increase torque, increase revolutions, increase speed,
reduce torque rise time.
- Increase Imax (C0022).
- Check maximum torque (C0057).
Stop drive and reactivate function.
6
7
8
9
Repeat identification.
Change marginal conditions of the drive (C1182-C1185),
i.e. increase torque, increase revolutions, increase speed,
reduce torque rise time.
Select higher torque or shorter torque rise time.
Release brake, check motor cable, remove blocking, if
necessary.
9300POSBA1098
5-31
Commissioning
5.12
Password protection
You can restrict the code access via the operating module using the password
protection in C0094.
- Reading C0094 using the operating module:
- C0094 = 0: Password protection is not activated.
- C0094 = 9999: Password protection is activated.
- Activate password protection:
- Enter four-digit number in C0094.
- Confirm using SH + PRG.
- Deactivate password protection:
- Enter four-digit number again.
- All other inputs are refused.
Effect
- Working with the operating module:
- The codes of the USER menu can still be read and changed.
- All other codes are no longer displayed.
- Working with the fieldbus:
- It is possible to extend the protection under C0096/1 (AIF) and C0096/2
(CAN) when working with a fieldbus.
Selection in C0096/X:
0
=
No protection
1
=
Read protection
2
=
Write protection
3
=
Read/write protection
5-32
9300POSBA1098
During operation
During operation
6.1
Status messages
6.1.1
On the operating module 9371 BB

Status messages on the operating module
Display
RDY
IMP
FAIL
IMAX
M MAX
On
Ready for operation
Power outputs inhibited
Active fault
(TRIP, Fail-QSP, message or warning)
Motor current setpoint C0022
Speed controller within its limitation
Drive is torque controlled.
Off
Initializing or fault
Power outputs enabled
No fault
Motor current setpoint C0022
Drive is speed-controlled
9300POSBA1098
6-1
During operation
6.1.2
In Global Drive Control

1. Click on the Control button in the Base settings dialog box.
2. Click on the Diagnostics button in the Control dialog box.

Fig. 6-1
Dialog box Diagnosis 9300
Type of fault
Actual speed
Actual motor voltage
Actual motor current
Motor torque
DC bus voltage
Heatsink temperature
Motor temperature
Controller load
10 Reset fault
11 Time when the supply voltage was applied
12 Time when the controller was enabled
13 Actual fault with time and frequency of the fault
14 Fault history with time and frequency of the fault
15 Reset history buffer
For item 13 ... 15 see also chapter 8.
6-2
9300POSBA1098
During operation
6.2
Information on operation
When operating the controller, please observe the following notes:
Stop!
- Cyclic connection and disconnection of the controller supply voltage at L1,
L2, L3 or +UG, -UG may overload the internal input current load:
- Allow at least 3 minutes between disconnection and connection.
- During mains switching (L1, L2, L3) it is not important whether further
controllers are supplied via the DC bus.
6.2.1
Switching on the motor side

- Switching on the motor side of the inverter is permissible for emergency
switch-off.
- Please note:
- Switching while a controller is enabled may cause the fault indication 0Cx
(short-circuit/earth fault in operating case x).
- For long motor cables and operation of controllers with smaller output
power, leakage currents through interfering cable capacitances may cause
the fault indication OCx.
- Switching equipment on the motor side must be dimensioned for DC
voltages (UDCmax = 800 V).
9300POSBA1098
6-3
During operation
6.2.2
Controller protection by current derating

Valid for the types 9326 to 9332.
For field frequencies < 5 Hz the controller automatically derates the maximum
permissible output current.
- For operation with chopping frequency = 8 kHz (C0018 = 1, optimum
power):
- The current is derated depending on the heatsink temperature (see
Fig. 6-2).
- For operation with chopping frequency = 16 kHz (C0018 = 2, optimum
noise):
- The current is always derated to Ir16 = I016 .
- For operation with automatic change-over of the chopping frequency
(C0018 = 0):
- Below the threshold, the controller operates with 16 kHz (optimum noise).
The function of the current derating follow the characteristic Imax 16 kHz
in Fig. 6-2.
- If a higher torque is required from the machine for example for acceleration,
the controller automatically switches to 8 kHz (optimum power). The
function of the current derating follows the characteristic Imax 8 kHz in
Fig. 6-2.
IM
o to r
I0
X
1 .5 * I0
I0
4 0
C
6 0
1 .2 5 * I0
I0
K <
1 .5 * IN
C
0
8
>
1 .5 * IN
1 6
= Im
= Im
a x
a x
a t 8 k H z
a t 1 6 k H z
IN
1 6
1 6
= c h a n g e o v e r to 8 k H z
a t C 0 0 1 8 = 0
|fd| [H z ]
K35.0129
Fig. 6-2
Current derating function of the types 9326 to 9332

JK
Heatsink temperature
Irx:
Rated current at U, V, W depending on the chopping frequency
Field frequency at the output U, V, W
fd:
I0x :
max. standstill current for field frequency = 0 Hz
See also the ratings in chapter 3.3.
6-4
9300POSBA1098
Configuration
7
7.1
Configuration
Configuration with Global Drive Control
With the Global Drive Control (GDC) PC program LENZE offers
- an easy to understand,
- simple,
- convenient
tool for the configuration of your specific drive task.
Function block library
- GDC offers a library of function blocks (FB).
- GDC also displays the complete assignment of a FB.
Signal configuration
The signal configuration is done with only one dialog box. It is a convenient way
- to display every FB as a block diagram.
- to see the assignment of the signal input at a glance.
- to enter the FB in the processing table.
- to print your signal configuration.
Terminal assignment
For the configuration of the freely assignable terminals there is
- a simple dialog box to link the digital inputs and outputs
- a simple dialog box to link the analog inputs and outputs
A comprehensive description of the configuration with GDC can be found in the
systems manual.
9300POSBA1098
7-1
Configuration
7.2
Monitoring
Various monitoring functions protect the drive from impermissible operating
conditions.
If a monitoring function is activated,
- the corresponding set reaction is triggered (see chapter 7.2.1).
- a digital output is set if it is assigned to the corresponding reaction.
- the fault indication is entered at the first position in the history buffer (see
chapter 8.2).
7.2.1
Reactions
The controller can react to faults in four different ways:
- TRIP (highest priority)
- Message
- FAIL-QSP
- Warning
- Off = no reaction (lowest priority)
For some operating faults you can determine the reaction of the controller (see
chapter 7.2.2).
TRIP
- Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high resistance until TRIP-Reset is
done
- The drive is idling (no control!).
- After TRIP reset (see chapter 8.4) the drive accelerates to its setpoint along
the set ramps.
7-2
9300POSBA1098
Configuration
Message
- Switches the power outputs U, V, W to a high resistance as long as the fault
is active.
- Short-term fault $ 0.5 s
- The drive is idling (no control!), as long as the fault is active.
- If the fault is eliminated, the drive moves to its set-value with maximum
torque.
- Long-term fault 0.5 s
- The drive is idling (no control!), as long as the fault is active.
- Controllers are reset.
- Position setpoint = Actual position.
Danger!
The drive restarts automatically if the fault is eliminated.
Warning
- The drive operates under control.
Off
- No reaction on operating faults! Monitoring is deactivated.
Stop!
If monitoring functions are deactivated, the drive may be destroyed.
FAIL-QSP
Brakes the drive to standstill within a defined time. Setpoint inputs for delays in
program sets are not considered.
- Brakes the drive to standstill via the QSP ramp.
- The time for the QSP ramp is set in the Base settings dialog box (see
chapter 5.6.3).
- The default setting of FAIL-QSP is described in chapter 8.3.
9300POSBA1098
7-3
Configuration
7.2.2
Set reactions
1. Click on the Parameter menu button in the Base settings dialog box.
2. Open the Dialog Diagnostics menu with a doubleclick
Fig. 7-1
3. Click on the Monitoring... button.
7-4
9300POSBA1098
Configuration
Fig. 7-2
Monitoring configuration 93xx dialog box
4. Click on the desired monitoring function.

5. Select possible or permitted reaction and confirm with OK.
An overview of the monitoring functions and the settings is described in chapter
7.2.3.
9300POSBA1098
7-5
Configuration
7.2.3
Monitoring functions
Overview of the fault sources detected by the controller, and the corresponding
reactions.
Fault indication
7-6
Possible reactions
Display
CCr
CE0
CE1
Meaning
System fault
Communication error (AIF)
Communication error at the process data input object
CAN-IN1 (time monitoring can be set under C0357/1)
T
T
T
M
-
W
T
T
Q
-
Off
-
Code
C0126
C0591
CE2

C0592
CE3

C0593
CE4
EEr
H05
H07
H10
H11
LP1
BUS-OFF state (many communication errors occurred)

External monitoring
Internal fault
Internal fault
Sensor fault: heat sink temperature
Sensor fault: indoor temperature
Motor phase failure detection (function block must be
entered in C0465)
T
T
T
-
T
T
T
T
-
T
T
T
-
C0595
C0581
C0588
LU
NMAX
OC1
OC2
OC5
OH
OH3
OH4
OH7
OH8
OU
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
Undervoltage
Maximum speed exceeded (C0596)
Short-circuit
Earth fault
I x t overload
Heat sink temperature 1 (max. permissible, fixed)
Motor temperature 1 (max. permissible, fixed)
Heat sink temperature 2 (adjustable; C0122)
Motor temperature 2 (can be set; code: C0121)
Motor temperature (fixed) via inputs T1/T2
Overvoltage in the DC bus
Limit switch negative = LOW
Limit switch positive = LOW
Contouring error - digital frequency > C0255
Position limit exceeded in negative direction
Position limit exceeded in positive direction
No reference
Parameter set mode absolute
Actual offset out of range
Impermissible programming
Encoder range exceeded
Phase overflow
Contouring error POS > C1218/1
Contouring error POS > C1218/2
Sync error
TP control error
Internal limitation
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T*
T
T
T
T
T
-
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
C0583
C0582
C0584
C0585
C1285/1
C1285/2
C0589
C1285/3
C1285/4
C1287/1
C1291/1
C1291/2
C1291/3
C1288/1
C0590
C1286/1
C1286/2
C1290/1
C1289/1
C1289/2
9300POSBA1098
C0597
Configuration
Fault indication
Display
PEr
PI
PR0
PR1
Sd2
Sd3
Sd5
Sd6
Sd7
Possible reactions
Meaning
Program error
Fault during initialization
General fault in parameter sets
Fault in parameter set 1
Resolver fault
Encoder fault at X9 PIN 8
Encoder fault at X6/1 X6/2 (C0034 = 1)
Sensor fault: motor temperature (X7 or X8)
Fault in the absolute value encoder at X8
T
T
T
T
T: TRIP
M: Message
W: Warning
Q: Interference/QSP
T*: Possible, but can destroy the drive if the fault is not eliminated in time
M
-
-: Lenze
W
T*
T*
T
T
-
Q
-
T: Possible
Off
T
T
-
Code
C0586
C0587
C0598
C0594
C0025
-: Not possible
Overcurrent diagram of the fault indication OC5

(100 % load)
Ixt diagram
Controller output current *
200 %
150 %
$

100 % thermal continuous current 100 %

for C0022 150 Irx
70 % thermal continuous current 70 %
for C0022 150 % Irx
time
10 s
60 s
120 s
180 s
* Rated controller current 100 %

x Depending on the chopping frequency of the inverter
Fig. 7-3
K35.0151
Max. permitted overcurrent depending on the time
9300POSBA1098
7-7
Configuration
7-8
9300POSBA1098
Troubleshooting and fault elimination

- You can recognize immediately whether a fault has occurred by display
elements or status information (see chapter 8.1).
- You can analyze the fault using the history buffer (chapter 8.2) and the list in
chapter 8.3.
- The list in chapter 8.3 indicates how to eliminate the fault.
8.1
Troubleshooting
Display on the controller
Two LEDs at the front of the controller indicate the controller status.
LED green
LED red
Cause
Controller enabled; no fault
Controller inhibit, switch-on inhibit
C0183; possibly C0168/1
Fail
C0168/1
Warning, Fail-QSP
C0168/1
3 : On
P : Off
Check
: Flashing
Display in Global Drive Control

- Open the Dialog Diagnostics menu in the parameter menu by a
doubleclick.
Fig. 8-1
- The dialog box Diagnosis 9300 indicates the controller status.
9300POSBA1098
8-1
Display on the operating module

Status messages in the display indicate the controller status.
Display
Controller state
Check
RDY
Drive ready, controllers can be inhibited
C0183, C0168/1
IMP
Pulses at the power stage inhibited
C0183, C0168/1
Imax
Max. current reached
Mmax
Max. torque reached
Fail
Interference caused by TRIP, Message, Fail-QSP or Warning
C0183, C0168/1
Display via the LECOM status word C0150

Bit
Meaning
FREE 0
IMP (pulse inhibit)
Freely assignable
0 = Pulses for power stage enabled
1 = Pulses for power stage inhibited
8-2
FREE 2
Freely assignable
FREE 3
Freely assignable
FREE 4
Freely assignable
FREE 5
Freely assignable
f d = 0 (actual speed = 0)
0 = n <> 0
1= n= 0
RSP (controller inhibit)
0 = Controller not inhibited

1 = Controller inhibited
8-11
Controller state
0=
1=
3=
6=
7=
8=
9=
A=
12
Warning
0 = No warning
1 = Warning
13
Message
0 = No message
1 = Message
14
FREE 14
Freely assignable
15
FREE 15
Freely assignable
9300POSBA1098
Controller initialization
Switch-on inhibit
Operation inhibited (controller inhibit)
Operation enabled
Message active
Fault active
Power off
Fail-QSP
8.2
Fault analysis with the history buffer

- The history buffer is used to trace faults.
- Fault messages are stored in the history buffer in the order of their
occurrence.
doubleclick.
Fig. 8-2
8.2.1
Structure of the history buffer

- The history buffer has 8 memory units. The fields under fault history show
the memory units 2 to 7.
- The fields under Actual fault show memory unit 1. It contains information on
the active fault.
- The second memory unit is written only after the elimination or
acknowledgement of the active fault. This entry eliminates the last fault
from the history buffer so that it can no longer be read.
- The history buffer contains three information units for every fault occurred.
The fields under Actual fault and Fault history have the following meaning:
- Field 1: Fault recognition and reaction
- Field 2: Time of interference
- Field 3: Frequency of interference
9300POSBA1098
8-3
The following table shows the assignment of information to the codes.

Code and information to be called
C0168
Fault recognition
and reaction
8-4
9300POSBA1098
C0169
Time of the last

occurrence
Memory unit
C0170
Frequency
Freq
ency of a
fault immediately
followed byy the
same fault
f lt
Subcode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Active fault
Memory unit 1
Memory unit 2
Memory unit 3
Memory unit 4
Memory unit 5
Memory unit 6
Memory unit 7
8.2.2
Working with the history buffer

doubleclick.
Fig. 8-3
Fault recognition and reaction (field 1)

- Contains the fault recognition for every memory unit and the reaction to the
fault.
- E.g. OH3 TRIP
- For a fieldbus, the fault indications are always represented by a fault
number (see chapter 8.3, row 2).
Please note:
- For faults occuring at the same time with different reactions:
- Only the reaction with the highest priority is entered
(priority = TRIP message FAIL-QSP warning).
- For faults occuring at the same time with the same reaction (e.g.
2 messages):
- Only the fault which occurred first is entered.
9300POSBA1098
8-5
Fig. 8-4
Time (field 2)
- Contains the times when the faults occurred:
- E.g. 1234567 s
- Reference time is the mains switch-on time (see Fig. 8-4, field top right).
Please note:
- If a fault is immediately followed by another several times, only the time of the
last occurrence is stored.
Frequency (field 3)
- Contains the frequency of a fault immediately followed by the same fault. The
time of the last occurrence is stored.
Reset fault
- Click on the TRIP reset button.
Clear history buffer
- This function is possible only when no fault is active.
- Click on the fault memory reset button.
8-6
9300POSBA1098
8.3
Fault indications
Tip!
If the fault indication is requested by a fieldbus, the fault indication is represented by
a fault number (C0168/x). See row 2 and the footnote at the end of this table.
Display Error
No.2)
Fault
Cause
--CCr
--71
No fault
System fault
Strong interference on control cables

Ground or earth loops in the wiring
CE0
61
Communication error
CE1
62
Communication error in
the process data object
CAN_IN_1
CE2
63
CE3
64
CE4
65
EEr
91
H05
H07
105
107
Internal fault
Incorrect power stage
H10
110
H11
111
LP1
32
Sensor fault: Heat sink

temperature
Sensor fault: Indoor
temperature
Motor phase failure
LU
30
Undervoltage
rMAX
200
Max. plant speed

exceeded (C0596)
Remedy
Screen the control cables

PE wiring (see chapter 4.3 Installation of
a CE-typical drive system)
Interference during transmission of control Plug in automation module firmly, bolt
commands via automation interface X1
down if necessary
CAN_IN_1 object receives faulty data, or
communication is interrupted
Check cable at X4
Check transmitter
Increase monitoring time under C0357/1
if necessary
Communication error in CAN_IN_2 object receives faulty data, or Check cable at X4
the process data object communication is interrupted
Check transmitter
CAN_IN_2
if necessary
Communication error in CAN_IN_3 object receives faulty data, or Check cable at X4
the process data object communication is interrupted
Check transmitter
CAN_IN_3
if necessary
BUS-OFF state
Controller has received too many incorrect Check wiring
telegrams by system bus X4 and has
Check bus termination (if any)
disconnected from the bus
Check screen contact of the cables
Check PE connection
Check bus load:
Reduce baud rate (observe cable length)
External fault (TRIP-Set) A digital input assigned to the TRIP set
Check external encoder
function has been activated
During initialization of the controller, an
incorrect power stage was detected
Contact Lenze
Contact Lenze
Sensor of heat sink temperature detection Contact Lenze

indicates indefinite values
Sensor of the indoor temperature
Contact Lenze
detection indicates indefinite values
A current-carrying motor phase has failed Check motor;
Check supply cables
The current limit is set too low
Set a higher current limit under C0599
This monitoring is not suitable for:
Deactivate monitoring with C0597 = 3
- Synchronous servo motors
- For field frequencies > 480 Hz
DC bus voltage is smaller than the value Check mains voltage
fixed under C0173
Check supply module
Active load (e.g. for hoists) too high
Check drive dimensioning.
Drive is not speed-controlled, torque
Increase torque limit if necessary.
excessively limited.
9300POSBA1098
8-7
Display Error
No.2)
Fault
Cause
Remedy
OC1
11
Short-circuit
Short-circuit
Excessive capacitive charging current of
the motor cable
OC2
12
Earth fault
OC5
15
I x t overload
One of the motor phases has earth

contact.
Excessive capacitive charging current of
the motor cable.
Frequent and too long acceleration with
overcurrent
Permanent overload with
Imotor > 1.05 x Irx
Ambient temperature
T a > 40 C or 50 C
Find out cause of short-circuit; check

cable.
Use motor cable which is shorter or of
lower capacitance.
Check motor; check cable.
Use motor cable which is shorter or of
lower capacitance.
OH
8-8
50
Heat sink temperature is

higher than the value set
in the controller
Allow controller to cool and ensure better

ventilation.
Check ambient temperature in the control
cabinet.
Clean heat sink.
Change mounting position.
Heat sink very dirty

Incorrect mounting position
Motor too hot because of excessive curMotor temperature is
rent or frequent and too long acceleration
higher than the value
val e set
No PTC connected.
Connect PTC or switch-off monitoring
in the controller
(C0583 = 3).
Ambient temperature
Allow controller to cool and ensure better
T a > 40 C or 50 C
ventilation.
Check ambient temperature in the control
Heat sink temperature is
cabinet.
higher than the value set
Heat sink very dirty
Clean heat sink
under C0122
Incorrect mounting position
Change mounting position.
Value set under C0122 was too low
Enter higher value.
Motor too hot because of excessive cur- Check drive dimensioning.
rent or frequent and too long acceleration
Motor temperature is
higher than the value set No PTC connected
Connect PTC or switch-off monitoring
under C0121
(C0584 = 3).
Value set under C0121 was too low
Enter higher value.
Motor too hot because of excessive cur- Check drive dimensioning.
PTC at terminals T1, T2 rent or frequent and too long acceleration
indicates motor overheat Terminals T1, T2 are not assigned
Connect PTC or thermostat or switch off
monitoring (C0585 = 3).
Overvoltage
Excessive brake energy (DC bus voltage
Use brake module or energy recovery
higher than set under C0173)
module.
OH3 1)
53
OH4
54
OH7 1)
57
OH8
58
OU
20
P01
151
Limit switch negative
Negative limit switch was reached.
Control drive in positive direction. Check

terminal connection X5/E2.
P02
152
Positive limit switch
Positive limit switch was reached.
Control drive in negative direction. Check

terminal connection X5/E1.
P03
153
Contouring error
P04
154
Negative position limit
9300POSBA1098
Phase difference between set and actual Extend contouring error limit with C0255
position is larger than the contouring error Switch off monitoring (C0589 = 3) if
limit set under C0255
necessary.
Drive cannot follow digital frequency
Check drive dimensioning
(Imax limit)
Negative position limit (C1224) was not
Find out why the value was not reached
reached
(e.g. incorrect position targets, set
function position value) and adjust the
negative position limit (C1224) if
necessary.
Display Error
No.2)
Fault
Cause
Remedy
P05
155
Positive position limit
Positive position limit (C1223) was

exceeded
P06
156
No reference
The homing point is unknown

For absolute positioning no homing was
performed before the first positioning.
Find out why the value was exceeded

(e.g. incorrect position targets, set
function position value) and adjust the
positive position limit (C1223) if
necessary.
Perform one of the following functions
and restart:
- Manual homing
- Start homing in the program
- Set reference
P07
157
PS Absolute mode
An absolute PS (C1311) was performed
instead of relative mode during relative positioning (position mode
C1210)
Perform one of the following functions

and restart:
- Change from absolute PS to relative PS.
- Change position mode.
P08
158
Actual offset out of

range
Adjust position limits if necessary, or

check whether program function Set
position value is to be applied.
P09
159
Impermissible
programming
P12
162
P13
163
P14
164
P15
165
P16
166
P17
167
Actual home offset (C1226) out of position

limits
Fault of the program function Set position
value
Impermissible programming
Check position program:

- After a PS with final speed a PS with
positioning has to follow; waiting for
input is not permissible.
Encoder range
The range of the absolute encoder was
Return drive by manual positioning. Check
exceeded
position limits and adjustment of the
encoder. The absolute encoder has to be
dimensioned and mounted such that its
range is not exceeded over the complete
positioning range.
Phase overflow
Phase controller limit reached
Enable drive
Drive cannot follow digital frequency (Imax Check drive dimensioning
limit)
First contouring error
The drive cannot follow the setpoint
- Increase current limit C0022 (observe
maximum motor current).
Contouring error is larger than limit value
in C1218/1.
- Reduce acceleration.
- Check drive dimensioning.
- Increase limit value under C1218.
Second contouring error The drive cannot follow the setpoint
- Increase current limit C0022 (observe
maximum motor current).
Contouring error is higher than limit value
in C1218/2.
- Reduce acceleration.
- Check drive dimensioning.
- Increase limit value under C1218.
Sync telegram from the master (PLC) is
Set C1121 (Sync cycle) to the
out of time pattern *
transmission cycle of the master (PLC).
Sync telegram from the master (PLC) does - Check communication channel.
not arrive *
- Check baud rate, controller address.
Transmission error of a
Controller enable (RFR) too soon
Enable controller with delay. The required
synch telegram on the
delay depends on the time between the
system bus
synch telegrams.
* C0362 shows the time between two
synch telegrams (C0362 = 0,
communication interrupted)
TP control error
Simultaneous use of the TP input by
Configure another TP input for FB POS
different function blocks (e.g. FB DFSET (not possible for DFSET) or switch off
and POS)
monitoring under C0580.
A conflict occurs.
9300POSBA1098
8-9
8-10
Display Error
No.2)
Fault
Cause
Remedy
P18
168
Internal limitation
Input extremely higher or smaller than

machine parameters
Check machine parameters.
PEr
74
Program interference
A fault in the program was detected
PI
79
Initializing error
PR0
PR1
75
72
Parameter set error
Sd2
82
Resolver fault
A fault was detected during transfer of

parameter set between the controllers
Parameter set does not match controller
Fault when loading a parameter set
CAUTION:
The default setting is loaded
automatically.
Resolver cable interrupted
Send controller with data (on diskette) to

Lenze.
Correct parameter set.
Sd3
83
Encoder fault at X9/8
Cable interrupted
Input X9 PIN 8 not assigned
Sd5
85
Master current at X6/1 X6/2 < 2 mA.
Sd6
86
Master current source

defective
Sensor fault
Sd7
87
Encoder fault
Absolute encoder with RS485 interface

does not transmit data
Encoder of the motor temperature

detection at X7 or X8 indicates indefinite
values
1)
Temperature detection via resolver or incremental encoder
2)
Displayed value
9300POSBA1098
=
=
=
=
{Error No.}
{Error No.}
{Error No.}
{Error No.}
+
+
+
+
0
1000
2000
3000
TRIP
Message
Warning
FAIL-QSP
Set the desired parameters and save

under C0003.
For PRO the supply voltage must be
switched off additionally.
Check resolver cable for open circuit.
Check resolver or switch off monitoring
(C0586 = 3).
Check cable for open circuit.
Assign input X9 PIN 8 with 5 V or switch
off monitoring (C0587 = 3).
Check cable for open circuit.
Check master current source.
Check supply cable for firm connection.
Switch off monitoring with C0594 = 3 if
necessary.
Check supply cable.
Check encoder.
Check voltage supply C0421.
No Stegmann encoder connected.
8.4
Rest of fault indications

TRIP
- After eliminating the fault, the pulse inhibit is only reset after
acknowledgement of TRIP.
- Acknowledge TRIP by:
- Global Drive Control:
Click on the TRIP reset button in the dialog box Diagnosis 9300 (see
chapter 8.2.2).
- Operating module 9371 BB:
Press STOP key.
Then press RUN to enable the controller again.
- Fieldbus module: Set C0043 = 0
- Control word C0135
- Terminal X5/E5
- Control word AIF
- Control word system bus (CAN)
Tip!
If a TRIP source is still active, the TRIP cannot be reset.
Message
- After eliminating the fault, the pulse inhibit is reset automatically.
Warning!
After eliminating the fault, the drive starts automatically.
9300POSBA1098
8-11
FAIL-QSP
- After eliminating the fault, the pulse inhibit is only reset after
acknowledgement of TRIP.
- Acknowledge TRIP by:
- Global Drive Control:
Click on the TRIP reset button in the dialog box Diagnosis 9300 (see
chapter 8.2.2).
- Operating module 9371 BB:
Press STOP key.
Then press RUN to enable the controller again.
- Fieldbus module: Set C0043 = 0
- Control word C0135
- Terminal X5/E5
- Control word AIF
- Control word system bus (CAN)
Tip!
If a TRIP source is still active, the TRIP cannot be reset.
Warning
- After eliminating the fault, the warning is reset automatically.
8-12
9300POSBA1098
Maintenance
Maintenance
- The controller is free of maintenance if the prescribed conditions of
operation are observed (see chapter 3.2).
- If the ambient air is polluted, the air vents of the controller may be
obstructed. Check the air vents periodically (depending on the degree of
pollution approx. every four weeks).
Free the obstructed air vents using a vacuum cleaner.
Stop!
Do not use sharp or pointed tools such as a knife or screwdriver to clean the air
vents.
9300POSBA1098
9-1
Maintenance
9-2
9300POSBA1098
Waste disposal
10 Waste disposal
The controller consists of different materials.
The following table indicates which materials can be recycled and which must be
separately disposed:
Material
Metal
Plastic
Assembled PCBs
Recycle
-
Dispose
-
Stop!
Dispose of the material according to the valid law regarding environmental
protection.
9300POSBA1098
10-1
Waste disposal
10-2
9300POSBA1098
Appendix
11 Appendix
11.1
Accessories
For the controllers, Lenze offers the following accessories:
- Mains filter
- Fuses
- Fuse holders
- System cable for resolver
- System cable for digital frequency coupling
A PC can be connected to the controller via the fieldbus module LECOM-A/B
(RS232, RS485 or fibre optics). The Global Drive Control (GDC)PC program allows
a simple programming of the controller.
Global Drive Control (GDC) PC program

The program runs under Windows and is supplied with drivers for LECOM-A/B
(RS232, RS485 or fibre optics).
Further functions of the PC program:
- Process signal visualization
- Diagnostics and troubleshooting
- Commissioning support
- Oscilloscope function
9300POSBA1098
11-1
Appendix
11.2
Code table
How to read the code table:
Row
Code
Abbreviation
C0039
1
2
14
15
[C0005]
Meaning
Code C0039
Subcode 1 of code C0039

Parameter value of the code can only be modified when controller is inhibited
LCD display of the operating module
Factory setting of the code
The row Important contains further information
99 Minimum value
{smallest step/unit}
maximum value
Meaning of the code
Additional, important explanation of the code
LCD
Lenze
Selection
Info
IMPORTANT
Code
*
1
-
LCD
C0002 Par load
C0003 Par save
C0004 Op-display
11-2
9300POSBA1098
{1 %}
Possible settings
Lenze
0
56
IMPORTANT
Selection
0
Load default
1
Load PS1
Info
Load factory setting into RAM
Load parameter set x into the
RAM and activate
11
Load ext PS1
20
Ext -> EEPROM
0
1
Ready
Save PS1
Load parameter set x from the

operating module into the RAM
and activate
Transmit all parameter sets
from the operating module to
the controller and store nonvolatile
Saving completed
Save parameter set
Save current parameter set x
non-volatile
11
Save extern
All available codes
Load parameter set

- Parameter set1 is
loaded automatically
after every mains
connection.
Save all parameter sets to the

operating module
Operating display
Operating module shows

selected code in the operating level if no other
status indications of
C0183 are active.
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
[C0005] Signal CFG
Lenze
20000
[C0006] Op mode
IMPORTANT
Selection
0
Common
100
CFG: empty
1000 Speed mode
20000 Standard pos
20003 Abs 3
20010 Abs/supply
20013 Abs/supply 3
20200 Relative
20203 Rel 3
20210 Rel/supply
20213 Rel/supply 3
22000 Abs/sp
22003 Abs/sp 3
22010 Abs/sp/sply
22013 Abs/sp/sply 3
22200 Rel/sp
22203 Rel/sp 3
22210 Rel/sp/sply
22213 Rel/sp/sply 3
26000 Set pos.sel
26010 Set pos.sel
Info
Signal configuration
(predefined basic configurations)
Servo async Y
Servo PM-SM Y
22
Servo async
{1}
C0009 LECOM address
C0011 Nmax
3000
500
C0012 Tir (acc)
0.000
0.000
{0.001 s}
C0013 Tif (dec)
0.000
0.000
{0.001 s}
C0017 FCODE (Qmin)
50
-16000
{1 rpm}
{1 rpm}
Operating mode of the motor

control
Servo control asynchronous
motors in star connection
Servo control synchronous
motors in star connection
Servo control asynchronous
motors in delta connection
99 Device address
16000 Maximum speed
999.900 Acceleration time Tir for the

main setpoint NSET
999.900 Deceleration time Tif for the
main setpoint NSET
16000 Switching threshold nact < nx
* Depending on C0086
- Change of C0086 re
resets value to the assigned default setting
- Change
Ch
off C0006 sets
t
C0086 = 0!
Bus device number when

operated via interface
- 10, 20, ..., 90
reserved for broadbast
to device groups for
RS232, RS485, fibre
optics.
Reference value for the
absolute and relative setpoint selection for the
acceleration and deceleration times.
- For parameterization
via interface:
Large changes in one
step should only be
made when the controller is inhibited.
Related to the speed
g 0nmax
change
nact < C0017 activates

the comparator output
CMP1-OUT
9300POSBA1098
11-3
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0018 fchop
Lenze
1
IMPORTANT
Selection
0
16/8 kHz sin
1
2
8 kHz sin
16 kHz sin
Info
Optimum noise reduction with Chopping frequency
automatic change-over to
8 kHz
Operation with optimum power
Operation with optimum noise
reduction
C0019 Thresh nact= 0
{1 rpm}
16000 Threshold when nact = 0 is

recognized
C0021 Slipcomp
0.00
0.00
{0.01 %}
20.00 Slip compensation
C0022 Imax current
[C0025] Feedback type
C0026
1 FCODE (offset)
2 FCODE (offset)
C0027
1 FCODE (gain)
2 FCODE (gain)
C0030 DFOUT const
11-4
Possible settings
9300POSBA1098
Active only in sensorless

control below the value
of C0291
*3.75 0
{0.01 A}
1.50 Ir Imaxlimit
- Change of C0086 resets value to the assigned factory setting
(1.5 x Imotor)
10
- Input of the encoder
Selection of the feedback
p
specified
on the namesystem
plate
l t off th
the LLenze
0
COMMON
C0420, C0490 or C0495 was
motor:
changed subsequently
- C0025 aautomatically
tomatically
10
RSx (Resolver)
The resolver is designated with
changes C0420,
RSxxxxxxxx.
C0490 C0495
C0490,
110
IT-512-5V
Incremental encoder with TTL
level
111
IT-1024-5V
112
IT-2048-5V
113
IT-4096-5V
210
IS-512-5V
Sine-cosine encoder
211
IS-1024-5V
212
IS-2048-5V
213
IS-4096-5V
310
AS-512-8V
Single turn
Sine-cosine encoder with
RS485 interface
Type Stegmann
410
AM-512-8V
Multi turn
Sine-cosine encoder with
RS485 interface
Type Stegmann
Freely assignable code for
Used for:
0.00
-199.99 {0.01 %}
199.99 relative analog signals
Offset for terminal
X6/1, 2
0.00
Offset for terminal
X6/3, 4
Used for:
100.00 -199.99 {0.01 %}
Gain X6/1, 2
100.00
Gain X6/3, 4
3
0
256 inc/rev
Constant for the digital
frequency output in increments
1
512 inc/rev
per revolution
2
1024 inc/rev
3
2048 inc/rev
4
4096 inc/rev
5
8192 inc/rev
6
16384 inc/rev
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
C0032 FCODE Gearbox
Lenze
1
Selection
-32767
{1}
C0033 Gearbox denom
{1}
C0034 Mst current
C0037
C0039
1
2
3
4
5
...
14
15
C0040
Setpoint rpm
JOG setpoint
JOG setpoint
JOG setpoint
JOG setpoint
JOG setpoint
...
JOG setpoint
JOG setpoint
Ctrl enable
100.0
75.00
50.00
25.00
0.00
...
0.00
0.00
1
Info
32767 Freely assignable code
Used for:
Gearbox factor numerator
32767 Gearbox factor (denominator)

for DFSET
0
-10 V ... + 10 V
Selection: Master voltage/
master current for setpoint
1
+4 mA ... + 20 mA
input
2
-20 mA ... + 20 mA
-16000
{1 rpm}
16000 Setpoint input in rpm
Fixed speeds (JOG setpoints)
-199.99
{0.01 }
199.99 can be selected for NSET using
digital inputs.
0
1
Ctrl inhibit
Ctrl enable
Controller inhibit
- Write:
- Controls the code

- Read:
- Reads the controller

status
C0042 DIS: QSP
C0046 DIS: N
C0049 DIS: NADD
C0050 MCTRL-NSET2
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
...
15
-199.99
-199.99
-100.00
JOG 15
{0.01 %}
{0.01 %}
{0.01 %}
C0051
C0052
C0053
C0054
C0056
-30000
0
0
0.0
-100.00
{1 rpm}
{1 V}
{1 V}
{0.1 A}
{0.01 %}
C0057 Max Torque
0.0
{0.1 Nm}
C0058 Rotor diff
-180.0
C0059 Mot pole No.

C0060 Rotor pos
1
0
{1}
{1}
C0061 Heatsink temp

C0063 Mot temp
0
0
{1 C}
{1 C}
C0043 TRIPreset
C0045 DIS: act JOG
MCTRL-NACT
MCTRL-Umot
UG-VOLTAGE
IMot
MCTRL-MSET2
QSP inactive
QSP active
No/TRIP reset
TRIP active
Nset active
JOG 1
JOG 2
{0.1 E}
Quick stop status
Display only
Reset current TRIP

Active TRIP
Active JOG setpoint
Reset of an active TRIP:

- Set C0043 = 0
199.99 Main setpoint

199.99 Additional setpoint
100.00 nset at the speed controller
input
30000 Actual speed
800 Actual motor voltage
900 DC bus voltage
500.0 Actual motor current
100.00 Torque setpoint (output of the
speed controller)
500.0 Maximum possible torque of
the drive configuration
179.9 Zero phase of the rotor for
synchronous motors (C0095)
50 Pole pair number of the motor
2047 Current rotor position
100 Heatsink temperature
200 Motor temperature
Display only
Display only
- Depending on C0022,
C0086
Display only
Display only
- 1 rev. = 2048 inc
Display only
9300POSBA1098
11-5
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C0064 Utilization
C0067 Act TRIP
Selection
0
{1 %}
See selection list #10

All fault indications
0.0
{0.5}
Momentary fault indication
C0070 Vp speed-CTRL
C0071 Tn speed-CTRL
1.0
{0.5 ms}
600.0 T nn speed controller
> 512 ms
switched off
C0072 Td speed-CTRL
C0075 Vp curr-CTRL
0.0
*
0.0
0.00
C0076 Tn curr-CTRL
0.5
{0.1 ms}
1999.0 T ni current controller
2000 ms
switched off
C0077 Vp field-CTRL
C0078 Tn field-CTRL
0.25
15.0
0.00
{0.01}
15.99 V pF field controller
1.0
{0.5 ms}
7999.0 T nF field controller
8000 ms
switched off
0.01
{0.01 kW}
500.00 Rated motor power acc. to
nameplate
{0.1 ms}
{0.01}
255.0 V pn speed controller
32.0 T dn speed controller

15.99 V pi current controller
[C0081] Mot power
[C0084] Mot Rs
0.00
{0.01 }
100.00 Stator resistance of the motor

required for C0006 = 1
[C0085] Mot Ls
0.00
{0.01}
200.00 Stray inductance of the motor

required for C0006 = 1
[C0086] Mot type
Selection motor type
11-6
IMPORTANT
Info
150 Controller load I x t during the
last 180 s
9300POSBA1098
COMMON
No Lenze motor
Display only
- C0064 >100 %
releases TRIP OC5
- TRIP reset is possible
only if C0064 < 95 %
Display only
- Change of C0086 rere
sets value to the assigned default setting
- Change of C0086 rere
sets value to the assigned default setting
- Change of C0086 resets value to the assigned default setting
- Change of C0081 sets
C0086 = 0
C0086 = 0
C0086 = 0
* Depending on the
controller
- Change of C0086
resets C0006, C0022,
C0070, C0071,
C0081, C0084,
C0085, C0087,
C0088, C0089,
C0090, C0091 to the
assigned default setting
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
[C0086] Mot type
Selection
10
DSKA56-140
11
DFKA71-120
12
DSKA71-140
13
DFKA80-60
14
DSKA80-70
15
DFKA80-120
16
DSKA80-140
17
DFKA90-60
18
DSKA90-80
19
DFKA90-120
20
DSKA90-140
21
DFKA100-60
22
DSKA100-80
23
DFKA100-120
24
DSKA100-140
25
DFKA112-60
26
DSKA112-85
27
DFKA112-120
28
DSKA112-140
30
DFQA100-50
31
DFQA100-100
32
DFQA112-28
33
DFQA112-58
34
DFQA132-20
35
DFQA132-42
40
DFQA112-50
41
DFQA112-100
42
DFQA132-36
43
DFQA132-76
50
DSVA56-140
51
DFVA71-120
52
DSVA71-140
53
DFVA80-60
54
DSVA80-70
55
DFVA80-120
56
DSVA80-140
57
DFVA90-60
58
DSVA90-80
59
DFVA90-120
60
DSVA90-140
61
DFVA100-60
62
DSVA100-80
63
DFVA100-120
64
DSVA100-140
65
DFVA112-60
66
DSVA112-85
67
DFVA112-120
68
DSVA112-140
IMPORTANT
Info
MDSKAXX056-22, fr: 140 Hz
MDFKAXX071-22, fr: 120 Hz
MDFQAXX100-50, fr: 50 Hz
DSVAXX056-22, fr: 140 Hz
DFVAXX071-22, fr: 120 Hz
New generation of Lenze

asynchronous servo
motors
Integrated temperature
monitoring via resolver or
encoder cable
- The temperature monitoring via resolver or
encoder cable is activated automatically,
i.e.:
C0583 = 0
C0584 = 2
C0594 = 0
Lenze asynchronous
servo motors
Without integrated temperature monitoring
encoder cable is deactivated automatically,
i.e.:
C0583 = 3
C0584 = 3
C0594 = 3
9300POSBA1098
11-7
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
11-8
9300POSBA1098
Selection
108
DSKS36-13-200
109
DSKS36-23-200
110
DSKS56-23-150
111
DSKS56-33-150
112
DSKS71-13-150
113
DFKS71-13-150
114
DSKS71-23-150
115
DFKS71-23-150
116
DSKS71-33-150
117
DFKS71-33-150
160
DSKS56-23-190
161
DSKS56-33-200
162
DFKS71-03-170
163
DSKS71-03-165
164
DSKS71-13-185
165
DFKS71-13-180
166
DSKS71-33-180
167
DFKS71-33-175
210
DXRA071-12-50
211
DXRA071-22-50
212
DXRA080-12-50
214
DXRA090-12-50
215
DXRA090-32-50
216
DXRA100-22-50
217
DXRA100-32-50
218
DXRA112-12-50
219
DXRA132-12-50
220
DXRA132-22-50
221
DXRA160-12-50
222
DXRA160-22-50
223
DXRA180-12-50
224
DXRA180-22-50
225
30kW-ASM-50
226
37kW-ASM-50
227
45kW-ASM-50
228
55kW-ASM-50
229
75kW-ASM-50
IMPORTANT
Info
MDSKSXX036-13, fr: 200 Hz
MDFKSXX071-13, fr: 150 Hz
MDSKSXX56-23-190, fr: 190 Hz
MDSKSXX56-33-200, fr: 200 Hz
MDFKSXX71-03-170, fr: 170 Hz
MDSKSXX71-03-165, fr: 165 Hz
MDSKSXX71-13-185, fr: 185 Hz
MDFKSXX71-13-180, fr: 180 Hz
MDSKSXX71-33-180, fr: 180 Hz
MDFKSXX71-33-175, fr: 175 Hz
DXRAXX071-12, fd : 50 Hz
New generation of Lenze

synchronous servo
motors
Integrated temperature
monitoring via resolver or
encoder cable
encoder cable is activated automatically,
i.e.:
C0583 = 0
C0584 = 2
C0594 = 0
Lenze inverter motor in

star connection
i.e.:
C0583 = 3
C0584 = 3
C0594 = 3
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
IMPORTANT
Selection
250
DXRA071-12-87
251
DXRA071-22-87
252
DXRA080-12-87
254
DXRA090-12-87
255
DXRA090-32-87
256
DXRA100-22-87
257
DXRA100-32-87
258
DXRA112-12-87
259
DXRA132-12-87
260
DXRA132-22-87
261
DXRA160-12-87
262
DXRA160-22-87
263
DXRA180-12-87
264
DXRA180-22-87
Info
[C0087] Mot speed
265
266
267
268
269
300
30kW-ASM-87
37kW-ASM-87
45kW-ASM-87
55kW-ASM-87
75kW-ASM-87
{1 rpm}
16000 Rated motor speed
[C0088] Mot current
0.5
{0.1 A}
500.0 Rated motor current
[C0089] Mot frequency
10
{1 Hz}
1000 Rated motor frequency
[C0090] Mot voltage
50
{1 V}
500 Rated motor voltage
[C0091] Mot cos phi
0.50
{0.01}
1.00 Motor cos
C0093 Drive ident
Lenze inverter motor in

delta connection
i.e.:
C0583 = 3
C0584 = 3
C0594 = 3
C0086 = 0
C0086 = 0
C0086 = 0
C0086 = 0
C0086 = 0
Controller identification
0
1
93xx
Invalid
None
93xx
Display only
Type Lenze servo positioning
controller
9300POSBA1098
11-9
Appendix
Code
LCD
Lenze
0
Selection
0
[C0095] Rotor pos adj
0
1
[C0096]
1 AIF protect.
2 CAN protect.
0
0
0
1
2
3
x.xx
C0094 Password
C0099
C0101
1
2
...
15
C0103
1
2
...
15
C0105
C0108
1
2
C0109
1
2
C0114
1
2
3
4
5
11-10
Possible settings
S/W version
IMPORTANT
Info
9999 Password
Inactive
Active
No password protection
Read protection
Write protection
Read/Write protection
Rotor position adjustment of a

synchronous motor
C0095 = 1 starts posiC0058 displays the zero angle tion adjustment
of the rotor
Extended password protection
for bus systems with activated
All codes in the user
password (C0094).
menu can be accessed.
add Tir
add Tir
...
add Tir
0.000
0.000
...
0.000
0.000
{0.001 s}
Software version
Additional acceleration times
999.900 Tir for the main setpoint NSET
add Tif
add Tif
...
add Tif
QSP Tif
0.000
0.000
...
0.000
0.000
0.000
{0.001 s}
Additional deceleration times

999.900 Tif for the main setpoint NSET
FCODE (gain)
FCODE (gain)
100.00 -199.99
100.00
{0.01 %}
999.900 Deceleration time for quick

stop (QSP)
FCODE (offset)
FCODE (offset)
0.00
0.00
-199.99
{0.01 %}

DIGIN pol
DIGIN pol
DIGIN pol
DIGIN pol
DIGIN pol
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
9300POSBA1098
Parameter access protection for the operating

module. When the password is activated, only
the codes of the user
menus can be accessed.
For further selection
possibilities see C0096.
Display only
change 0nmax.

change nmax ... 0
0.000
{0.001 s}
HIGH active
LOW active
Terminal polarity
X5/E1
X5/E2
X5/E3
X5/E4
X5/E5
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze
15000
30002
30014
30104
30105
30106
30107
30108
30109
30110
30111
30112
30113
30114
30115
30116
30117
30118
30119
30120
30121
30122
30123
30124
30125
30126
30127
30128
30129
30130
30131
30132
Selection
51/25132
CFG: DIGOUT
CFG: DIGOUT
CFG: DIGOUT
CFG: DIGOUT
*
30101
30013
500
30012

DCTRL-TRIP
CMP1-OUT
DCTRL-RDY
MCTRL-MMAX
DIGOUT pol
DIGOUT pol
DIGOUT pol
DIGOUT pol
OH7 limit
0
0
0
0
150
0
1
45
{1 EC}
C0122 OH4 limit
85
45
{1 EC}
C0125 Baud rate
0
1
2
3
4
9600 baud
4800 baud
2400 baud
1200 baud
19200 baud
[C0116] 01: CFG: FDO-0

02: CFG: FDO-1
03: CFG: FDO-2
04: CFG: FDO-3
05: CFG: FDO-4
06: CFG: FDO-5
07: CFG: FDO-6
08: CFG: FDO-7
09: CFG: FDO-8
10: CFG: FDO-9
11: CFG: FDO-10
12: CFG: FDO-11
13: CFG: FDO-12
14: CFG: FDO-13
15: CFG: FDO-14
16: CFG: FDO-15
17: CFG: FDO-16
18: CFG: FDO-17
19: CFG: FDO-18
20: CFG: FDO-19
21: CFG: FDO-20
22: CFG: FDO-21
23: CFG: FDO-22
24: CFG: FDO-23
25: CFG: FDO-24
26: CFG: FDO-25
27: CFG: FDO-26
28: CFG: FDO-27
29: CFG: FDO-28
30: CFG: FDO-29
31: CFG: FDO-30
32: CFG: FDO-31
[C0117]
1
2
3
4
C0118
1
2
3
4
C0121
High active
Low active
Info
CFG: FDO (Free digital outputs) Signal assignment of the
free digital outputs. Used
for LECOM or system
bus.
Signal configuration DIGOUT

X5/A1
X5/A2
X5/A3
X5/A4
Terminal polarity DIGOUT
X5/A1
X5/A2
X5/A3
X5/A4
150 Temperature threshold for
early warning motor temperature (OH7 fault)
85 Temperature threshold for warning heat sink temperature
(fault OH4)
LECOM baud rate for 2102

module
9300POSBA1098
11-11
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0126 MONIT CE0
Possible settings
Lenze
3
IMPORTANT
Selection
0
TRIP
2
Warning
3
Off
C0130 DIS: act Ti
C0134 RFG charac
C0135 Control word
C0136
1
2
3
C0141
CTRL C135
CTRL AIF
CTRL CAN
FCODE (setval)
C0142 Start options
0
1
2
...
14
15
0
1
0
Ti 14
Ti 15
Linear
S-shaped
{1}
Active Titimes of NSET

C0012/C0013 active
Tir1/Tif1 active
Tir2/Tif2 active
...
Tir14/Tif14 active
Tir15/Tif15 active
Linear
S-shaped
65535 Control word when networked
with automation interfaces
Display of control words of

C0135, AIF and CAN
0.00
-199.99
{0.01 %}
199.99 Freely assignable code for

relative analog signals
Start options
0
1
Start lock
Auto start
C0151 DIS: FDO (DW)
Output signals configured with

C0116
C0155 Status word 2
CFG: STAT.B0
CFG: STAT.B2
CFG: STAT.B3
CFG: STAT.B4
CFG: STAT.B5
CFG: STAT.B14
CFG: STAT.B15
9300POSBA1098
1000
30012
1000
10600
30013
15004
500
{1}
0 = Start protection
1 = automatic start
C0150 Status word
[C0156]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11-12
C12/C13
Ti 1
Ti 2
Info
Configuration communication
error monitoring with automation interface CE0
{1}

PAR*1
MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-MMAX
NSET-RFG I=O
CMP1-OUT
DCTRL-CW/CCW
DCTRL-RDY
65535 Status word when networked

with automation interfaces
Hexadecimal signal assignment of the free digital outputs.
65535 Status word 2
Configuration of the free bits of

the status word
Display only
Ramp characteristic for

setpoint
Decimal control word
- Device evaluates information 16 bit, binary
coded.
Display only
Used as main setpoint in
the configurations
C0005 = xxx1
Is executed:
- After mains connection
- After message
(t > 0.5 s)
- After TRIP
Decimal status word
- Display only
- Binary interpretation
indicates the bit states
- Display only
Extended decimal status
word
- Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C0157
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C0161
DIS: STAT.B0
DIS: STAT.B2
DIS: STAT.B3
DIS: STAT.B4
DIS: STAT.B5
DIS: STAT.B14
DIS: STAT.B15
Act TRIP
C0167 Reset failmem

C0168
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C0169
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C0170
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[C0173]
Failtime act
Failtime old1
Failtime old2
Failtime old3
Failtime old4
Failtime old5
Failtime old6
Failtime old7
C0178 Op timer
Info
1
Status of the free bits of the
status word
Fail No. act

Fail No. old1
Fail No. old2
Fail No. old3
Fail No. old4
Fail No. old5
Fail No. old6
Fail No. old7
Counter act
Counter old1
Counter old2
Counter old3
Counter old4
Counter old5
Counter old6
Counter old7
UG limit
IMPORTANT
Selection

(see chapter 8.3)
0
No reset
1
Reset
(see chapter 8.3)
Display only
Momentary fault indiations

(as under C0168/1)
Clears the history buffer

Faults occurred
Now active
Last
Last but one
Last but two
Last but three
Last but four
Last but five
Last but six
Corresponding mains switch-on Occurrence of the faults
time
Now active
Last
Last but one
Last but two
Last but three
Last but four
Last but five
Last but six
Fault frequency
Now active
Last
Last but one
Last but two
Last but three
Last but four
Last but five
Last but six
Adaptation of DC bus voltage
thresholds
0
Mains < 400 V+ -B
Operation on mains < 400 V
with or without brake unit
1
Mains = 400 V+ -B
Operation on 400 V mains with
or without brake unit
2
Mains = 460 V+ -B
or without brake unit
3
Mains = 480 V - B
Operation on 480 V mains
without brake unit
4
Mains = 480 V+ B
brake unit
0
{1 s} 4294967295 Elapsed operating time meter
History buffer
- List of fault occurred
- Display only
History buffer
- List of times when the
faults have occurred
under C0168
- Related to C0179
- Display only
History buffer
- List of how often the
faults have occurred
consecutively under
C0168
- Display only
- Check during commis-
g and adapt,
p , if
sioning
necessary
- All drive components
in DC bus
b s connections
must have the same
thresholds
Time when the controller

was enabled
9300POSBA1098
11-13
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C0179 Mains timer

C0182 Ti S-shaped
20.00
Selection
0
0.01 s
IMPORTANT
Info
{1 s} 4294967295 Mains switch-on time meter
{0.01 s}
50.00 s Ti time of the S-shaped ramp

generator for NSET
C0183 Diagnostics
g
C0190 NSET arit
C0195 BRK1 T act
11-14
9300POSBA1098
99.9
0
10
91
92
93
102
103
104
105
111
112
113
121
122
123
124
125
126
141
142
OK
Init
TRIP-Set C135
TRIP-Set AIF
TRIP-Set CAN
TRIP
RFG P-OFF
IMP Message
Power off
BSP C135
BSP AIF
BSP CAN
CINH term 28
CINH int 1
CINH int 2
CINH C135/STP
CINH AIF
CINH CAN
Lock mode
IMP
151
152
153
154
250
0
1
2
3
4
5
QSP ext term

QSP C135/STP
QSP AIF
QSP CAN
Warning
OUT = C46
C46 + C49
C46 - C49
C46 *C49
C46 / C49
C46/(100 - C49)
0.0
{0.1 s}
99.9 s Infinite
Drive diagnostics
No fault
Initialization phase
TRIP active
Emergency stop was released
Message active
Time when the mains

was switched on
Determines the S-shape
- Small values A
small S rounding
- High values A
large S rounding
- Display
p y onlyy
- Indicates fault or status
information
- If several items or fault
or status information
are to be shown, the
information with the
smallest number is
displayed
Operation inhibited
Controller inhibited via X5/28

DCTRL-CINH1
DCTRL-CINH2
STOP key of 9371BB
Controller inhibited via AIF
Controller inhibited via CAN
Restart protection active
Power outputs with high
resistance
QSP via MCTRL-QSP
QSP via STOP key
QSP via AIF
QSP via CAN
Warning active
Arithmetics block in the function block NSET
99.9 Brake engaging time
Connects main setpoint

C0046 and additional
setpoint C0049
Engaging time of the

mechanical holding
brake (see technical data
of the brake).
- After the time elapsed
under C0195, the status mechanical brake
closed is reached
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0196 BRK T release
C0200
C0201
C0202
C0203
C0204
C0206
C0207
C0208
C0209
C0220
Possible settings
Lenze
0.0
IMPORTANT
Selection
0.0
{0.1 s}
Info
60.0 Brake disengaging time
S/W Id
S/W date
Internal ID
Comm.-No.
Serial-No.
Product date
DL info 1
DL info 2
DL info 3
NSET Tir add
0.000
0.000
{0.001 s}
999.900
C0221 NSET Tif add
0.000
0.000
{0.001 s}
999.900
C0222 PCTRL Vp
C0223 PCTRL Tn
1.0
400
C0224 PCTRL Kd
0.0
0.1
{0.1}
500.0
20
{1 ms}
99999
99999 ms
switched off
0.0
{0.1}
5.0
C0241 NSET RFG I = O
1.00
0.00
{0.01 %}
100 % = nmax
C0244 BRK M set
0.00
-100.00 {0.01 %}
100.00 Holding torque of the DC
injection brake
100 % = value of C0057
C0250 FCODE 1Bit

C0252 Phase offset
-245760000 {1 inc} 245760000 Phase offset for DFSET
C0253 Angle n-trim
-32767
C0254 Vp angle-CTRL
C0255 Threshold P03
0.2000 0.0000
327680 10
0
{0.001}
x / xxxx / xxxxx
0
{1}
{1 inc}
100
65535
Software identification
Software release date
Internal identification
Commission number
Serial number
Production date
Download-Info 1
Download-Info 2
Download-Info 3
Acceleration time Tir of the
additional setpoint for NSET
Deceleration time Tif of the
additional setpoint for NSET
Disengaging time of the

mechanical holding
brake (see technical data
of the brake).
- After time has elapsed
under C0195, the status mechanical brake
closed is reached
Display only

change 0nmax.
change nmax. ... 0
Process controller gain Vp

Process controller integral
component Tn
Process controller differential
component Kd
100.00 Threshold ramp generator for

main setpoint
Input = output
32767 Phase trimming for DFSET
Fixed phase offset for

digital frequency configuration
- 1 rev. = 65536 inc
Speed-dependent phase
trimming
* Depending on C0005,
C0025, C0490
- Change of C0005,
C0025, or C0490
resets C0253 to the
default setting
- 1 rev. = 65536 inc
- C0253 is reached at
15000 rpm
{0.0001}
3.9999 V p phase controller in MCTRL
{1 inc} 1800000000 Contouring error limit
Contouring error limit for
fault P03
- 1 rev. = 65536 inc
- Contouring error
> C0255 releases fault
P03
9300POSBA1098
11-15
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
C0260 MPOT1 high
Lenze Selection
100.00 -199.99 {0.01 %}
C0261 MPOT1 low
-100.0 -199.99
C0262 MPOT1 Tir
10.0
0.1
{0.1 s}
C0263 MPOT1 Tif
10.0
0.1
{0.1 s}
C0264 MPOT1 on/off
C0265 MPOT1 init
[C0267]
1 CFG: UP
2 CFG: DOWN
[C0268] CFG: INACT
1000
1000
1000
C0269
1
2
3
C0325
DIS: UP
DIS: DOWN
DIS: INACTIVE
Vp2 adapt
{0.01 %}
Mandatory
- C0260 > C0261
199.99 Lower limit of motor potentio- Mandatory
meter
- C0261 < C0260
6000.0 Motor pot acceleration time Tir Related to change
0100 %
6000.0 Motor pot deceleration time Tif Related to change

1000 %
Deactivation function of motor - Function which is
executed when motor
potentiometer
potentiometer
t ti t iis
0
No function
No change
deactivated via the
1
Down to 0 %
Deceleration with Tif to 0 %
input
Deceleration with Tif to C0261
2
Down to C261
MPOT1-INACTIVE.
Inhibit with Tif = 0 to 0 %
3
Jump 0 %
Inhibit with Tif = 0 to C0261
4
Jump to C261
Acceleration with Tir to C0260
5
Up to C260
Initialization function of motor - Value which is acceppotentiometer
ted during mains
0
Power off
Value during mains failure
switching and activated motor potentio1
C261
Lower limit of C0261
meter
2
0%
0%
Configuration of the digital
inputs of motor pot. MPOT1
FIXED 0
Digital input acceleration
FIXED 0
Digital input deceleration
Configuration of the motor pot.
input MPOT1-INACTIVE
FIXED 0
Input signals motor potentiometer
1.0
0.1
{0.1}
C0326 Vp3 adapt
1.0
0.1
{0.1}
C0327 Set2 adapt
100.00 0.00
{0.01 %}
100.00 Process controller adaptation

nset2
C0328 Set1 adapt
0.00
{0.01 %}

nset1
0.00
C0329 Adapt on/off

0
11-16
Info
199.99 Upper limit of motor potentiometer
9300POSBA1098
No
1
2
3
Extern Vp
Setpoint
Ctrl diff
Display only

gain (Vp2)
gain (Vp3)
Activate process controller

adaptation
No process controller adaptation
External via input
Adaptation via setpoint
Adaptation via control difference
Set speed threshold of

the process controller
adaptation
Mandatory
- C0327 > C0328
Set speed threshold of
the process controller
adaptation
Mandatory
- C0328 < C0327
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
C0332 PCTRL Tir
Lenze
0.000
Selection
0.000
{0.001 s}
Info
999.900 Process controller acceleration Related to setpoint
time Tir
change 0100 %
C0333 PCTRL Tif
0.000
0.000
999.900 Process controller deceleration Related to setpoint

time Tir
change 1000 %
500.0 Process controller momentary Display only
Vp
C0336 DIS: act Vp
0.0
C0337 Bi/unipolar
C0338 ARIT1 funct
[C0339]
1
2
C0340
1
2
[C0350]
[C0351]
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CAN address
CAN baud rate
[C0352] CAN mst

C0353
1
2
3
C0354
1
2
3
4
5
6
C0355
1
2
3
4
5
6
C0356
1
2
3
4
1000
1000
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
{0.1}
Bipolar
Unipolar
OUT = IN1
IN1 + IN2
IN1 - IN2
IN1 *IN2
IN1 / IN2
IN1/(100 - IN2)
Process controller range bipolar/unipolar
Function arithmetic block

ARIT1

FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
{1}
500 kbit/s
250 kbit/s
125 kbit/s
50 kbit/s
1000 kbit/s
Slave
Master
C350
C354
0
0
0
0
1
IN1 addr2
OUT1 addr2
IN2 addr2
OUT2 addr2
IN3 addr2
OUT3 addr2
129
1
257
258
385
386
CAN-IN1 Id
CAN-OUT1 Id
CAN-IN2 Id
CAN-OUT2 Id
CAN-IN3 Id
CAN-OUT3 Id
{1}
Display only
63 CAN bus node address
CAN bus baud rate
Install CAN bus master operation

Source for CAN bus IN/OUT
addresses
512
CAN bus IN/OUT node
addresses 2
{1}
2047
CAN bus identifier
3000
0
0
20
Links inputs IN1 and IN2
Configuration arithmetic block

ARIT1
Input signals arithmetic block
ARIT1
CAN addr sel1

CAN addr sel2
CAN addr sel3
CAN boot up
CAN-OUT2 T
CAN-OUT3 T
CAN delay
{0.001 s}
{1 ms}
Display only
65000
CAN bus time settings
9300POSBA1098
11-17
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C0357]
1
2
3
C0358
CE1monit time
CE2monit time
CE3monit time
Reset node
C0359 CAN state
Possible settings
Lenze
Selection
3000
3000
3000
0
0
1
0
1
2
3
IMPORTANT
Info
{1 ms}
No function
CAN reset
Operational
Pre-Operational
Warning
Bus off
C0360
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Message OUT
Message IN
Message OUT1
Message OUT2
Message OUT3
Message POUT1
Message POUT2
Message IN1
Message IN2
Message IN3
Message PIN1
{1}
12 Message PIN2
C0361
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Load OUT
Load IN
Load OUT1
Load OUT2
Load OUT3
Load POUT1
Load POUT2
Load IN1
Load IN2
Load IN3
Load PIN1
65000
Install CAN bus reset node
CAN bus status

Telegram counter
(number of telegrams)
65535 All sent
All received
Sent to CAN-OUT1
Sent to CAN-OUT2
Sent to CAN-OUT3
Sent to parameter channel1
Received from CAN-IN1
Received from parameter
channel1
channel2
{1 %}
12 Load PIN2
C0362 Sync cycle
C0363 Sync corr
0
1
[C0364] CFG:CAN activ

1000
C0365 DIS:CAN activ
C0366 Sync Response
11-18
9300POSBA1098
CAN bus monitoring time for Irx
{1 ms}
1
0.8 ms
2
1.6 ms
3
2.4 ms
4
3.2 ms
5
4.0 ms
FIXED 0
0
0
No sync response
1
Sync response
CAN bus load

100 All sent
All received
Sent to CAN-OUT1
Sent to CAN-OUT2
Sent to CAN-OUT3
channel1
channel2
30 Time between two sync telegrams on the system bus
Display only
Display only
- For values > 65535
the counting restarts
with 0
- Display only
- To ensure a perfect
operation, the total bus

load (all connected
devices) should be less
than 80 %
Display only
Correction value for C0362
Activate process data externally

1 Input signal CAN active
CAN Sync Response
Change over from preoperation to operation

Display only
Appendix
Code
C0367
C0368
C0369
C0400
[C0402]
LCD
Sync Rx ID
Sync Tx ID
Sync Tx Time
DIS: OUT
CFG: OFFSET
Possible settings
Lenze
128
128
0
19502
[C0403] CFG: GAIN
19504
C0404
1
2
C0405
[C0407]
DIS: OFFSET
DIS: GAIN
DIS: OUT
CFG: OFFSET
-199.99
19503
[C0408] CFG: GAIN
19505
IMPORTANT
Selection
1
{1}
1
{1}
0
{1 ms}
-199.99 {0.01 %}
FCODE-26/1
FCODE-27/1
{0.01 %}
-199.99
199.99 Input signals of AIN2
[C0420] Encoder const
512
256
{1 inc/rev}
[C0421] Encoder volt
5.00
5.00
{0.1 V}
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
-32767
0
1
2
C0426 DIS: OUT

C0427 DFIN function
C0429 TP5 delay
C0430 01: TP1 delay

02: TP2 delay
03: TP3 delay
04: TP4 delay
[C0431] CFG: IN
0.218
0.218
0.218
0.218
5001
[C0432] CFG: OFFSET

19512
199.99 Input signals of AIN1

199.99 Output of AIN2
Configuration offset of AIN2
{0.01 %}
{1}
Display only
Configuration gain of AIN2
99999999
Display only
For Lenze motors

Correction of the resolver error - Read resolver error
from the nameplate
8192 Encoder constant for encoder

input X8 in increments per
revolution
8.00 Set supply voltage for the
encoder used
256 inc/rev
512 inc/rev
1024 inc/rev
Constant for digital frequency
input in increments per revo2048 inc/rev
lution
4096 inc/rev
8192 inc/rev
16384 inc/rev
{1 rpm}
32767 Output signal of DFIN
2-phase
Type of the digital frequency
signal
A puls / B dir
0 = Quadrature
Puls A or B
1 = Pulse / Direction
2 = Puls A / Puls B
-32767
{1 inc}
32767 Dead time compensation for
the TP function of DFSET and
DFRFG
0.000/2.000
{ms}
TP1 delay

MCTRL-NACT
FCODE-109/1
Display only
Configuration gain of AIN1
-199.99
{1 %}
FCODE-26/2
FCODE-27/2
C0409
1 DIS: OFFSET
2 DIS: GAIN
[C0416] Resolver adj
C0425 DFIN const
256
256
65000
199.99
Info
CAN Sync Rx ID
CAN Sync Tx ID
CAN Sync Tx Time
Output of AIN1
Configuration offset of AIN1
CAUTION:
Incorrect input may
destroy the encoder
Display only
Configuration input of AOUT1

Configuration offset of AOUT1
9300POSBA1098
11-19
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
[C0433] CFG: GAIN

19510
C0434
1
2
3
[C0436]
DIS: IN
DIS: OFFSET
DIS: GAIN
CFG: IN
-199.99
5002
[C0437] CFG: OFFSET
19513
[C0438] CFG: GAIN
19511
C0439
1
2
3
[C0440]
C0441
C0443
DIS: IN
DIS: OFFSET
DIS: GAIN
CFG: STATE-BUS
DIS: STATE-BUS
DIS: DIGIN-OUT
C0444
1
2
3
4
[C0450]
DIS: DIGOUT1
DIS: DIGOUT2
DIS: DIGOUT3
DIS: DIGOUT4
CFG: NX
{1}
199.99
Input signals of AOUT1
1000
[C0452] CFG: SIGN
1000
Configuration offset of AOUT2

Configuration gain of AOUT2
199.99
Input signals of AOUT2
Configuration state bus X5/ST

Monitoring signal State bus
255 Signals at X5/E1 to X5/E5
decimal value
9300POSBA1098
Display only
Display only
indicates terminal
signals
{0.01 %}
Display only
Configuration analog input of

BRK1
Configuration digital input of
BRK1
BRK1
199.99 Analog input signals of BRK1
Display only
Digital input signal of BRK1
0
1
Original
Changed
Status of selected base configuration
11-20
Display only

FIXED 0%
FIXED 0
FIXED 0%
-199.99
Display only
Configuration input of AOUT2
Signals at X5/A1 to X5/A4
[C0451] CFG: ON
C0464 Customer I/F
{0.01 %}

0
1000
C0458
1 DIS: NX
2 DIS: SIGN
C0459 DIS: ON
{0.01 %}
Info
Configuration gain of AOUT1

MCTRL-MSET2
FCODE-109/2
FCODE-108/2
-199.99
1000
IMPORTANT
Selection
FCODE-108/1
Display only
- Reassignment of terminals in a base configuration from C0005
does not change
C0005 and sets
C0464 = 1.
- Adding or removing of
function blocks or
changing the signal
flow among the function blocks in a base
configuration of C0005
sets C0005 = 0 and
C0464 = 1.
Appendix
Code
[C0465]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
...
19
...
22
...
25
...
28
...
31
...
41
42
...
49
50
C0466
LCD
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
FB list
...
FB list
...
FB list
...
FB list
...
FB list
...
FB list
...
FB list
FB list
...
FB list
FB list
CPU T remain
Possible settings
Lenze
*
200
0
50
0
0
55
0
0
10250
0
0
0
5650
0
0
5050
0
5700
0
10650
0
70
0
75
0
250
0
25000
20000
0
0
0
IMPORTANT
Selection
Info
Processing sequence list of
function blocks
change of C0005
loads assigned
Contained in the program of
processing list
signal processing (sequence in
which the function blocks are * Valid for
processed)
C0005 = 1000
- After changing the
signal flow adapt the
processing list in every
case. Otherwise, the
device may use wrong
signals!
- The function blocks
DIGIN, DIGOUT, AIF-IN,
CAN-IN, and MCTRL
are always processed
and do not have to be
entered in the list.
Residual process time for the

processing of function blocks
Function of the STOP key of
the operating module
Deactivated
Controller inhibit
Quick stop
[C0469] Fct STP key

2
0
1
2
Inactive
CINH
QSP
{1}
C0470
1
2
3
4
C0471
FCODE bit 0-7

FCODE bit 8-15
FCODE bit 16-23
FCODE bit 24-31
FCODE 32 bit
0
0
0
0
0
C0472
1
2
3
...
19
20
FCODE analog
FCODE analog
FCODE analog
...
FCODE analog
FCODE analog
0.00
-199.99
0.00
100.00
...
0.00
0.00
255

digital signals
Display only
Function is activated
when pressing the STOP
key.
The data words C0470

and C0471 are in parallel
and are identical.
{1} 4294967296 Freely assignable code for

digital signals
{0.01 %}
199.99
relative analog signals
9300POSBA1098
11-21
Appendix
Code
C0473
1
2
3
...
9
10
C0474
1
2
3
4
5
C0475
1
2
[C0490]
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze
Selection
FCODE abs
FCODE abs
FCODE abs
...
FCODE abs
FCODE abs
1
1
0
...
0
0
-32767
FCODE PH
FCODE PH
FCODE PH
FCODE PH
FCODE PH
0
0
0
0
0
-2147483648 {1} 2147483648
FCODE DF
FCODE DF
Feedback pos
0
0
-16000
Info
{1}

absolute analog signals

phase signals
{1 rpm}
0
1
2
3
Resolver
Encoder TTL
Encoder sin
Absolut ST
Absolut MT
[C0495] Feedback n
0
C0497 Nact-filter
11-22
9300POSBA1098
2.0
32767
0
1
2
3
Resolver
Encoder TTL
Encoder sin
Absolut ST
Absolut MT
0.0
0 ms
{0.1 ms}
switched off

16000 phase difference signals
Feedback system for position
controller
Resolver at X7
Encoder TTL at X8
Sin/cos encoder at X8
Absolute value encoder ST
at X8
Absolute value encoder MT
at X8
Feedback system for the
speed controller
Resolver at X7
Encoder TTL at X8
sin/cos encoder at X8
Absolute value encoder ST
at X8
Absolute value encoder MT
at X8
50.0 Time constant actual speed
1 rev. = 65536 inc
1 rev. = 65536 inc

- C0490 = 0, 1, 2 can
be mixed with
C0495 = 0, 1, 2.
- C0490 = 3, 4 also
sets C0495 to the
same value.
- C0495 = 0, 1, 2 can
be mixed with
C0490 = 0, 1, 2.
- C0495 = 3, 4 also
sets C0490 to the
same value.
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze
C0517
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
...
31
32
[C0520]
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
User menu
...
User menu
User menu
CFG: IN
[C0521] CFG: VP-DIV

[C0522] CFG: RAT-DIV
[C0523] CFG: A-TRIM
[C0524] CFG: N-TRIM
[C0525] CFG: 0-PULSE
[C0526] CFG: RESET
[C0527] CFG: SET
Selection
0
{1}
199900
51.00 C0051/0 MCTRL-NACT
54.00 C0054/0 Imot
56.00 C0056/0 MCTRL-MSET2
46.00 C0046/0 DIS: N
49.00 C0049/0 DIS: NADD
183.00 C0183/0 Diagnostics
168.01 C0168/1 Fail No. act
86.00 C0086/0 Mot type
22.00 C0022/0 Imax current
5.00
C0005/0 Signal cfg
11.00 C0011/0 Nmax
12.00 C0012/0 Tir
13.00 C0013/0 Tif
105.00 C0105/0 QSP Tif
39.01 C0039/1 JOG setpoint
70.00 C0070/0 Vp speed CTRL
71.00 C0071/0 Tn speed CTRL
0
Not assigned
0
Not assigned
94.00 C0094/0 Password
3.00
C0003/0 Par save
1000
FIXED PHI-0
1000
FIXED 0%
1000
FIXED 0%
1000
FIXED 0%
1000
FIXED 0%
1000
FIXED 0
1000
FIXED 0
1000
FIXED 0
C0528
1 DIS: 0-pulse A
-2000000000
{1 inc}
2000000000
2 DIS: Offset
Info
User menu with up to
32 entries
- Under the subcodes
the numbers of the

desired codes are
entered.
- The input is done in
the format xxx.yy
- xxx: Code number
- yy: Subcode for code
- It is not checked
whether the entered
code exists.
Configuration input of DFSET

Configuration gain factor numerator of DFSET
Configuration gearbox factor
numerator of DFSET
Configuration phase trimming
of DFSET
Configuration speed trimming
of DFSET
Configuration one-time zero
pulse is activation of DFSET
Configuration reset integrators
of DFSET
Configuration set integrators of
DFSET
Phase difference between two Display only
zero pulses
Offset of C0523*C0529 +
C0252
C0529 Multip offset

C0530 DF evaluation
1
1
C0531 Act 0 div
C0532 0-pulse/TP
-20000
{1}
20000 Offset multiplier
0
With g factor
Evaluation of the setpoint inte- Evaluation of the setpoint
grator of DFSET (with/without integrator of DFSET
1
Without g factor
gearbox factor)
1
{1}
16384 Actual zero pulse divider of
DFSET
1
2
3
0-pulse
Touch probe
0-pulse/Touch probe
Selection zero pulse of the

feedback system or touch
probe for DFSET
9300POSBA1098
11-23
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
C0533 Vp denom
Lenze
1
Selection
1
C0534 0-pulse fct
C0535
C0536
1
2
3
C0537
0
1
2
10
11
12
13
1
C0538
1
2
3
C0539
C0540
Set 0 div
DIS: VP-DIV
DIS: RAT-DIV
DIS: A-TRIM
DIS: N-TRIM
DIS: 0-PULSE
DIS: RESET
DIS: SET
DIS: IN
Function
11-24
9300POSBA1098
{1}
32767 Absolute analog input signals

of DFSET
-199.99
{0.01 %}
199.99 Relative analog input signal of

DFSET
1000

FIXED 0
[C0544] CFG: SYN-RDY
Fix setpoint
Fix setpoint
Fix setpoint
Fix setpoint
Fix setpoint
...
Fix setpoint
Fix setpoint
-32767
1000
C0560
1
2
3
4
5
...
14
15
Inactive
Continuous
Cont. switch
Zero pulse function of DFSET
Once, fast way
Once, cw
Once, ccw
Once, 2*0-puls
{1}
16384 Set zero pulse divider of DFSET
32767 Input signal of DFSET

Analog input
Phase difference input
Resolver simulation + zero
pulse
3
Res + ext 0
Resolver simulation without
zero pulse
4
OUT = DFIN
X9 is output on X10
5
OUT = encoder
X8 is output on X10
DFOUT
MCTRL-NACT
Configuration digital frequency
input of DFOUT
FIXED PHI 0
[C0542] CFG: DF-IN
C0548 DIS: SYN-RDY

C0549 DIS: DF-IN
{1}
Display only
Digital input signals of DFSET
[C0541] CFG: AN-IN
C0545 PH offset
C0546 Min inc/rev
C0547 DIS: AN-IN
IMPORTANT
Info
32767 Gain factor denominator of
DFSET
0
1000
-32767
{1 rpm}
0
Analog input
1
PH diff input
2
Res + int 0
0
1
-199.99
0
-32767
100.00 -199.99
75.00
50.00
25.00
0.00
...
0.00
0.00
X9 is inhibited if 0,, 1,, 2

or 3 was selected.
l td
The input signals get a

gain.
Configuration synchronization
signal for the zero pulse of
DFOUT
{1 inc}
65535 Phase offset of DFOUT
1 rev.
rev = 65535 inc
{1 inc} 2147483647
{0.01 %}
DFOUT
1 Digital input signal of DFOUT Display only
{1 rpm}
32767 Absolute analog input signal of
DFOUT
{0.01 %}
199.99
Fixed setpoints of FIXSET1
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
[C0561] CFG: AIN

1000
[C0562]
1
2
3
4
C0563
C0564
1
2
3
4
[C0570]
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: AIN
1000
1000
1000
1000
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
IMPORTANT
Selection
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
-199.99 {0.01 %}
Info
FIXSET1
Configuration digital inputs of

FIXSET1
199.99 Analog input signal of FIXSET1
Digital input signals of FIXSET1
1000
[C0571] CFG: LOAD
1000

FIXED 0%
FIXED 0
-199.99 {0.01 %}
Display only

S&H1
S&H1
C0572 DIS: IN
C0573 DIS: LOAD
C0577 Vp fld weak
3.0
0.00
C0578 Tn fld weak
10
Field weakening controller

adjustment time Tn
C0581 MONIT EEr
2.0
{0.5 ms}
8192.0
8000 ms
switched off
0
TRIP
1
Message
2
Warning
3
Off
4
Fail-QSP
2
Warning
3
Off
0
TRIP
3
Off
2
Warning
3
Off
0
2
3
0
2
3
0
2
3
0
2
3
0
2
3
Configuration monitoring OH8 Temperature monitoring

(motor temperature adjustable) via PTC input
C0582 MONIT OH4
C0583 MONIT OH3
C0584 MONIT OH7
C0585 MONIT OH8
C0586 MONIT SD2
C0587 MONIT SD3
C0588 MONIT H10/H11
C0589 MONIT P03
{0.01 ms}
TRIP
Warning
Off
TRIP
Warning
Off
TRIP
Warning
Off
TRIP
Warning
Off
TRIP
Warning
Off
199.99 Analog input signal of S&H1

Display only
Digital input signal of S&H1
15.99 Field weakening controller gain
Vp
Configuration monitoring EEr

(external fault)
Configuration monitoring OH4

(heat sink temperature)
Configuration monitoring OH3
(motor temperature fixed)
Configuration monitoring OH7 * Depending on C0086

(motor temperature adjustable) Temperature monitoring
via resolver input
Configuration monitoring SD2

(resolver)
(encoder at X9)
Configuration monitoring H10
and H11 (thermal sensors in
the controller)
Configuration monitoring P03
(contouring error)
9300POSBA1098
11-25
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0590 MONIT P13
Lenze
0
C0591 MONIT CE1
C0592 MONIT CE2
C0593 MONIT CE3
C0594 MONIT SD6
C0595 MONIT CE4
C0596 Nmax limit
5500
C0597 MONIT LP1
C0598 MONIT SD5
C0599 Limit LP 1
5.0
C0600 Function
[C0601]
1
2
C0602
1
2
[C0610]
1
2
3
C0611
1
2
3
C0620
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DB1 gain
C0621 DB1 value
11-26
Possible settings
9300POSBA1098
0
2
3
0
2
3
1.0
TRIP
Warning
Off
TRIP
Warning
Off
{0.1}
0
1
2
3
4
5
OUT = IN1
IN1 + IN2
IN1 - IN2
IN1 *IN2
IN1 / IN2
IN1/(100 - IN2)
Info
Configuration monitoring P13
(phase error)
Configuration monitoring CE1
(CAN-IN1 fault)
(CAN-IN2 fault)
(CAN-IN3 fault)
(motor temperature sensor)
{0.01 %}
16000 Monitoring: Speed of the

machine
Configuration monitoring motor
phase failure
Configuration monitoring
master current at
X5/1.2 < 2 mA
10.0 Current limit for motor phase
failure monitoring
Function arithmetic block
ARIT2
{0.01 %}
1.00
-10.00
{0.01}
1.00
0.00
{0.01 %}
Links inputs IN1 and IN2
Configuration analog inputs of

ARIT2
199.99 Analog input signals of ARIT2

FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
-199.99

(CAN bus off)

FIXED 0 %
FIXED 0 %
-199.99
1000
1000
1000
IMPORTANT
Selection
0
TRIP
2
Warning
3
Off
0
TRIP
2
Warning
3
Off
0
TRIP
2
Warning
3
Off
0
TRIP
2
Warning
3
Off
0
TRIP
2
Warning
3
Off
0
TRIP
2
Warning
3
Off
0
{1 rpm}
199.99
Display only

addition block ADD1
Adds inputs IN1, IN2 and

IN3
Analog input signals of ADD1
Display only
10.00 Gain dead band component

DB1
100.00 Dead band of DB1
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
[C0622] CFG: IN
C0623
C0630
C0631
[C0632]
DIS: IN
Max limit
Min limit
CFG: IN
C0633 DIS: IN
C0640 Delay T
Selection
1000
FIXED 0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
100.00 -199.99 {0.01 %}
-100.0 -199.99 {0.01 %}
1000
FIXED 0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
20.00 0.01
{0.01 s}
IMPORTANT
Lenze
[C0641] CFG: IN
1000
C0642
C0650
C0651
[C0652]
DIS: IN
DT1-1 gain
Delay T
CFG: IN
C0653 Sensibility
C0654
C0655
C0656
[C0657]
DIS: IN
Numerator
Denominator
CFG: IN
1.00
1.00
1000
1
1
1
1000
C0658 DIS: IN
[C0661] CFG: IN
1000
C0662 DIS: IN
C0671 RFG1 Tir
C0672 RFG1 Tif
[C0673] CFG: IN
0.000
0.000
1000
[C0674] CFG: SET

1000
[C0675] CFG: LOAD
1000
C0676
1 DIS: IN
2 DIS: SET
C0677 DIS: LOAD
Info
DB1
199.99 Analog input signal of DB1
199.99 Upper limit of limiter LIM1
199.99 Lower limit of limiter LIM1
LIM1
Display only
199.99 Analog input signal of LIM1

50.00 Time constant of the PT1-1
component
PT1-1
Display only
Analog input signal of PT1-1

Gain of DT1-1 component
Time constant of DT1-1
DT1-1
Display only

FIXED 0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
199.99
-320.00
{0.01}
320.00
0.005
{0.01 s}
5.000
FIXED 0%
1
15-bit
2
14-bit
3
13-bit
4
12-bit
5
11-bit
6
10-bit
7
9-bit
-199.99 {0.01 %}
199.99
-32767
{1}
32767
1
{1}
32767
FIXED 0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
199.99
FIXED 0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
199.99
0.000
{0.01 s} 999.900
Input sensitivity of DT1-1
Analog input signal of DT1-1

Numerator for CONV5
Denominator for CONV5
CONV5
Display only
Analog input signal of CONV5 Display only

Configuration analog input absolute-value generator ABS1
Analog input signal of ABS1
Acceleration time Tir of ramp
generator RFG1
0.000
{0.01 s} 999.900 Deceleration time Tif of RFG1
RFG1
FIXED 0%
Configuration set input of
RFG1
FIXED 0%
RFG1
FIXED 0
Analog input signals of RFG1
-199.99 {0.01 %}
199.99
Display only
Display only
Digital input signal of RFG1
9300POSBA1098
11-27
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0680 Function
C0681
C0682
[C0683]
1
2
C0684
1
2
C0685
C0686
C0687
[C0688]
1
2
C0689
1
2
C0690
C0691
C0692
[C0693]
1
2
C0694
1
2
[C0700]
Possible settings
Lenze
6
Hysteresis
Window
1.00
1.00
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
Function
Hysteresis
Window
1.00
1.00
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
Function
Hysteresis
Window
1.00
1.00
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
C0701 DIS: IN
[C0703] CFG: IN
1000
11-28
9300POSBA1098
Function comparator CMP1
Compares the inputs IN1

and IN2
{0.01 %}
IN1 = IN 2
IN 1 > IN2
IN 1 < IN2
|IN1| = |IN2|
|IN1| > |IN2|
|IN1| < |IN2|
199.99 Analog input signals of CMP1
Display only

and IN2
0.00
{0.01 %} 100.00 % Hysteresis of CMP2
0.00
{0.01 %} 100.00 % Window of CMP2
FIXED 0%
CMP2
FIXED 0%
1
2
3
4
5
6
{0.01 %}
IN1 = IN 2
IN 1 > IN2
IN 1 < IN2
|IN1| = |IN2|
|IN1| > |IN2|
|IN1| < |IN2|
Display only

and IN2
0.00
0.00
{0.01 %} 100.00 % Window of CMP3
CMP3
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
-199.99
19523
C0704 DIS: IN
C0710 Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
-199.99
1
Info
0.00
0.00
{0.01 %} 100.00 % Window of CMP1
CMP1
MCTRL-NACT
FCODE-17
-199.99
IMPORTANT
Selection
1
IN1 = IN 2
2
IN 1 > IN2
3
IN 1 < IN2
4
|IN1| = |IN2|
5
|IN1| > |IN2|
6
|IN1| < |IN2|
{0.01 %}

FCODE-472/3
-199.99 {0.01 %}
FIXED 0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
0
Rising trans
1
Falling trans
2
Both trans
Display only
Configuration input of von

ANEG1
199.99 Input signal of ANEG1
Configuration input of ANEG2
Display only
199.99 Input signal ANEG2

Function edge evaluation
TRANS1
Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
C0711 Pulse T
[C0713] CFG: IN
Possible settings
Lenze
0.001
1000
C0714 DIS: IN
C0715 Function
C0716 Pulse T
[C0718] CFG: IN
0.001
1000
C0719 DIS: IN
C0720 Function
C0721 Delay T
[C0723] CFG: IN
1.000
1000
C0724 DIS: IN
C0725 Function
C0726 Delay T
[C0728] CFG: IN
1.0
1000
C0729 DIS: IN
C0730 Mode
C0731 Status
[C0732]
1
2
3
4
[C0733]
1
C0734
CFG: channel1
CFG: channel2
CFG: channel3
CFG: channel4
1000
1000
1000
1000
CFG: Dig. trigger

Trigger source
1000
1
C0735 Trigger level
C0736 Trigger edge
Selection
0.001
{0.001 s}
FIXED 0
0
Rising trans
1
Falling trans
2
Both trans
0.001
{0.001 s}
FIXED 0
0
On delay
1
Off delay
2
On/Off delay
0.001
{0.001 s}
FIXED 0
0
On delay
1
Off delay
2
On/Off delay
0.001
{0.001 s}
FIXED 0
0
1
0
IMPORTANT
Info
60.000 Pulse time of TRANS1
TRANS1
Digital input signal of TRANS1
Function edge evaluation
TRANS2
60.000 Pulse time of TRANS2
TRANS2
Digital input signal of TRANS2
Function digital delay
component DIGDEL1
LOW/HIGH edge
HIGH/LOW edge
Display only
60.000 Delay time of DIGDEL1

DIGDEL1
Digital input signal of DIGDEL1 Display only
Function digital delay component DIGDEL2
60.000 Delay time of DIGDEL2
DIGDEL2
Start measurement
Stop measurement
Measurement completed
1
Measurement active
2
Trigger recognized
3
Cancel
4
Cancel after trigger
5
Read memory
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0
0
Dig. trigger input
1
Channel 1
2
Channel 2
3
Channel 3
4
Channel 4
-32767
{1}
32767
0
1
Display only
Digital input signal of DIGDEL2 Display only

Start / Stop of the measurement recording of OSZ
Current operating state of OSZ Display only

OSZ
Configuration trigger input of

OSZ
Selection of the trigger source
of OSZ
Set trigger level for channel

1 ... 4 of OSZ
Selection of the trigger edge of
OSZ
9300POSBA1098
11-29
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
C0737 Trigger delay
Selection
-100.0
{0.1 %}
C0738 Scanning period
C0739 Number of
channels
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1
C0740
1 During start
2 Free/Inhibit
0
1
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
5s
10 s
20 s
50 s
1 min
2 min
5 min
10 min
{1}
DIS: Version
DIS: Memory size
DIS: Data width
DIS: Number of
channels
C0742 DIS: Data block
length
C0743 DIS: Read data
block
C0744 Memory size
C0749
1 DIS: Cancel index
2 DIS: Index trigger
3 DIS: Index end
9300POSBA1098
Info
999.99 Setting pre and post triggering
of OSZ
Selection of the scanning
period of OSZ
4 Number of channels to be
measured of OSZ
Determine start point when

16383 reading the data memory of
OSZ
Deliberate selection of a
memory block
Data reading inhibited The data memory of OSZ must
Data reading enabled be enabled for reading
{1}
C0741
1
2
3
4
11-30
IMPORTANT
Lenze
0.0
OSZ
Sub1
Sub2
Sub3
Sub4
Version
Memory size
Data width
Number of channels
Display only
Data block length of OSZ

Reading an 8 byte data block
2048
512
1024
1536
2048
3072
4096
8192
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Adapt memory depth to the

measurement task
Information on saving the

measured values
Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
C0750 Vp denom
Lenze
16
C0751 DFRFG1 Tir
1.000
Selection
1
Gain = 1
2
Gain = 1/2
4
Gain = 1/4
8
Gain = 1/8
16
Gain = 1/16
32
Gain = 1/32
64
Gain = 1/64
128
Gain = 1/128
256
Gain = 1/256
512
Gain = 1/512
1024 Gain = 1/1024
2048 Gain = 1/2048
4096 Gain = 1/4096
8192 Gain = 1/8192
16384 Gain = 1/16384
0.001
{0.001 s} 999.900
C0752 Max speed
3000
C0753 DFRFG1 QSP
0.000
0.000
{0.001 s}
C0754 PH error
10
{1 inc}
C0755 Syn window
100
C0756 Offset
C0757 Function
0
0
1000
-1109
{1 inc}
0
No TP start
1
With TP start
FIXED PHI-0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
1000

FIXED 0
[C0758] CFG: IN
1000
[C0759] CFG: QSP
1000
[C0760] CFG: STOP
[C0761] CFG: RESET

C0764
1
2
3
C0765
Info
Denominator gain of position
controller of DFRFG1
Acceleration time Tir of

DFRFG1
16000 Maximum make up speed of
DFRFG1
{1 rpm}
999.900 Deceleration time Tif for QSP of

DFRFG1
2000000000 Contouring error of DFRFG1
{1 inc}
* 2000000000
1 rev. = 65535 inc
65535 Synchronization window of

DFRFG1
1109 Offset of DFRFG1
Function of DFRFG1
Configuration phase input of
DFRFG1
Configuration digital input
(triggering QSP) of DFRFG1
(ramp generator stop) of
DFRFG1
(reset integrators) of DFRFG1
Digital input signals of DFRFG1
DIS: QSP
DIS: STOP
DIS: RESET
DIS: IN
C0766 Speed dir.
Display only
-32767
1
[C0770] CFG: D
1000
[C0771] CFG: CLK
1000
[C0772] CFG: CLR
1000
{1 rpm}
1
cw / ccw
2
cw
3
ccw
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
32767 Absolute analog input signal of

DFRFG1
Preselection of the direction of
speed via DFRFG1
Configuration data input of
FLIP1
Configuration clock input of
FLIP1
Configuration reset input of
FLIP1
9300POSBA1098
11-31
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C0773
1
2
3
[C0775]
DIS: D
DIS: CLK
DIS: CLR
CFG: D
[C0776] CFG: CLK

1000
[C0777] CFG: CLR
1000
DIS: D
DIS: CLK
DIS: CLR
CFG: N
[C0781] CFG: N-INV

1000
[C0782] CFG: NADD
1000
[C0783] CFG: NADD-INV
1000
[C0784] CFG: CINH-VAL
1000
[C0785] CFG: SET
1000
[C0786] CFG: LOAD
1000
CFG: JOG*1
CFG: JOG*2
CFG: JOG*4
CFG: JOG*8
1000
1000
1000
1000
CFG: TI*1
CFG: TI*2
CFG: TI*4
CFG: TI*8
CFG: RFG-0
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
[C0790] CFG: RFG-STOP

1000
11-32
9300POSBA1098

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0

AIN1-OUT
R/L/Q-R/L
ASW1-OUT
FIXED 0
MCTRL-NACT
MCTRL-NSET2
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
DIGIN3
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
Display only
Configuration data input of

FLIP2
Configuration clock input of
FLIP2
FLIP2
Digital input signals of FLIP2
1000
[C0787]
1
2
3
4
[C0788]
1
2
3
4
[C0789]
IMPORTANT
Info
Digital input signals of FLIP1
1000
C0778
1
2
3
[C0780]
Selection
Display only
Configuration main setpoint

input of NSET
Configuration main setpoint
inversion of NSET
Configuration additional setpoint input of NSET
Configuration additional setpoint inversion of NSET
Configuration output signal
with controller inhibit of NSET
Configuration ramp generator
of NSET
Configuration digital input (load
ramp generator) of NSET
Configuration JOG selection

and JOG activation of NSET
Configuration Ti selection and

Ti activation of NSET

(ramp generator 0) of NSET
(ramp generator stop) of NSET
Binary interpretation
- Tir and Tif pairs are
identical
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C0798
1
2
C0799
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
[C0800]
DIS: CINH-VAL
DIS: SET
-199.99
DIS: N-INV
DIS: NADD-INV
DIS: LOAD
DIS: JOG*1
DIS: JOG*2
DIS: JOG*4
DIS: JOG*8
DIS: TI*1
DIS: TI*2
DIS: TI*4
DIS: TI*8
DIS RFG-0
DIS: RFG-STOP
CFG: SET
Info
{0.01 %}
199.99 Analog input signals of NSET
Display only
Digital input signals of NSET
1000
[C0801] CFG: ACT
1000
[C0802] CFG: INFLU
1000
[C0803] CFG: ADAPT
1000
[C0804] CFG: INACT
1000
[C0805] CFG: I-OFF
1000
C0808
1
2
3
4
C809
1
2
[C0810]
1
2
[C0811]
IMPORTANT
Selection
DIS: SET
DIS: ACT
DIS: INFLU
DIS: ADAPT

FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
-199.99
{0.01 %}
Configuration setpoint input of

process controller PCTRL1
Configuration actual value
input of PCTRL1
Configuration evaluation input
of PCTRL1
Configuration adaptation input
of PCTRL1
Configuration deactivation
input of PCTRL1
(switch off I-component) of
PCTRL1
199.99
Display only
Digital input signals of PCTRL1
DIS: INACT
DIS: I-OFF
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: SET
1000
1000
1000
C0812
1 DIS: IN
2 DIS: IN
C0813 DIS: SET
[C0815]
1 CFG: IN
2 CFG: IN
Analog input signals of

PCTRL1

AIN2-OUT
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0

analog switch ASW1
ASW1
Analog input signals of ASW1
-199.99
{0.01 %}
199.99
Digital input signal of ASW1
1000
1000

FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
Display only

analog switch ASW2
9300POSBA1098
11-33
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
[C0816] CFG: SET

1000
C0817
1 DIS: IN
2 DIS: IN
C0818 DIS: SET
[C0820]
1
2
3
C0821
1
2
3
[C0822]
1
2
3
C0823
1
2
3
[C0824]
1
2
3
C0825
1
2
3
[C0826]
1
2
3
C0827
1
2
3
[C0828]
1
2
3
C0829
1
2
3
[C0830]
1
2
3
11-34
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
IMPORTANT
Selection
FIXED 0
Analog input signals of ASW2

-199.99
{0.01 %}
1000
1000
1000

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
1000
1000
1000

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
9300POSBA1098

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
Display only

the AND element AND5
Digital input signals of AND5
1000
1000
1000
Display only

1000
1000
1000
Display only

1000
1000
1000
Display only

1000
1000
1000
Display only

DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
199.99
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
Info
ASW2

the OR element OR1
Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C0831
1
2
3
[C0832]
1
2
3
C0833
1
2
3
[C0834]
1
2
3
C0835
1
2
3
[C0836]
1
2
3
C0837
1
2
3
[C0838]
1
2
3
C0839
1
2
3
[C0840]
Selection
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
Digital input signals of OR1
1000
1000
1000

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
1000

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
Display only

the OR element OR5
Display only

FIXED 0

the digital NOT element NOT1
Display only
1000

FIXED 0
Digital input signal of NOT1

1000

Display only

FIXED 0
1000

Display only

FIXED 0
Display only

FIXED 0

Display only
1000
C0841 DIS: IN
[C0842] CFG: IN
C0843 DIS: IN
[C0844] CFG: IN
C0845 DIS: IN
[C0846] CFG: IN
C0847 DIS: IN
[C0848] CFG: IN
1000
C0849 DIS: IN

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
Display only

the OR element OR4
1000
1000
1000
Display only

the OR element OR3
1000
1000
1000
Display only

the OR element OR2
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
IMPORTANT
Info
9300POSBA1098
11-35
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
[C0850]
1
2
3
[C0851]
1
C0852
CFG: OUT.W1
CFG: OUT.W2
CFG: OUT.W3
1000
1000
1000
CFG: OUT.D1
Type OUT.W2
1000
0
C0853 Type OUT.W3
C0854 Type OUT.W1
C0855 DIS: IN (0-15)

DIS: IN (16-31)
C0856
1
2
3
C0857
C0858
1
2
3
C0859
[C0860]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
[C0861]
1
2
3
C0863
1
2
3
4
5
6
11-36
IMPORTANT
Selection
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0INC
0
Analog
1
Digital 0-15
2
D1: low phase
3
D2: high phase
0
Analog
1
Digital 16-31
2
High phase
0
Analog
3
D2: low phase
0
Configuration 32-bit phase

information
Configuration process output
word 2 for automation interface AIF (X1)
FFFF Process input words hexadecimal for automation interface
Display only
X1
DIS: IN.W1
DIS: IN.W2
DIS: IN.W3
DIS: IN.D1
-199.99
-2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32-bit phase information
Display only
DIS: OUT.W1
DIS: OUT.W2
DIS: OUT.W3
DIS: OUT.D1
-199.99
Process output words
Display only
100 % = 16384
32-bit phase information
Display only
CFG: OUT1.W1
CFG: OUT1.W2
CFG: OUT1.W3
CFG: OUT2.W1
CFG: OUT2.W2
CFG: OUT2.W3
CFG: OUT2.W4
CFG: OUT3.W1
CFG: OUT3.W2
CFG: OUT3.W3
CFG: OUT3.W4
5001
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
CFG: OUT1.D1
CFG: OUT2.D1
CFG: OUT3.D1
30021
1000
1000
DIS: IN1 dig0

DIS: IN1 dig16
DIS: IN2 dig0
DIS: IN2 dig16
DIS: IN3 dig0
DIS: IN3 dig16
9300POSBA1098
{0.01 %}
Info
words for automation interface
AIF (X1)
{0.01 %}
199.99
199.99
-2147483648 {1} 2147483647

FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0INC
FIXED 0INC
FIXED 0INC
0
Process input words decimal
Display only
100 % = 16384

words for system bus output
blocks (CAN)
Configuration 32-bit phase

information for system bus
output blocks (CAN)
FFFF
Process input words hexadeciDisplay only
mal for system bus (CAN)
Appendix
Code
C0864
1
2
3
C0865
1
2
3
C0866
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
C0867
1
2
3
C0868
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
C0869
1
2
3
[C0870]
1
2
[C0871]
LCD
Possible settings
Selection
Info
Type OUT1.W2
Type OUT2.W1
Type OUT3.W1
0
0
0
0
1
2
Analog sign
Digital 0-15
Low phase

words for system bus (CAN)
Type OUT1.W3
Type OUT2.W2
Type OUT3.W2
0
0
0
0
1
2
Analog sign
Digital 16-31
High phase
Configuration proces output

words for system bus (CAN)
DIS: IN1.W1
DIS: IN1.W3
DIS: IN2.W1
DIS: IN2.W2
DIS: IN2.W3
DIS: IN2.W4
DIS: IN3.W1
DIS: IN3.W2
DIS: IN3.W3
DIS: IN3.W3
DIS: IN3.W4
-199.99
DIS: IN1.D1
DIS: IN2.D1
DIS: IN3.D1
-2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32-bit phase information for

system bus (CAN)
DIS: OUT1.W1
DIS: OUT1.W2
DIS: OUT1.W3
DIS: OUT2.W1
DIS: OUT2.W2
DIS: OUT2.W3
DIS: OUT2.W4
DIS: OUT3.W1
DIS: OUT3.W2
DIS: OUT3.W3
DIS: OUT3.W4
-199.99
DIS: OUT1.D1
DIS: OUT2.D1
DIS: OUT3.D1
-2147483648 {1} 2147483647 32-bit phase information for

system bus (CAN)
199.99
{0.01 %}
Display only
100 % = 16384
Display only
Process output words system

199.99 bus (CAN)
Display only
100 % = 16384
CFG: CINH
CFG: CINH
1000
1000
CFG: TRIP-SET
1000
CFG: TRIP-RES
55
DIS: CINH1
DIS: CINH2
DIS: TRIP-SET
DIS: TRIP-RES
{0.01 %}
Process input words for

system bus (CAN)
[C0876]
C0878
1
2
3
4
IMPORTANT
Lenze

FIXED 0
FIXED 0
DIGIN 4
DIGIN 5
Display only
Configuration digital inputs

(inhibit controller) of DCTRL
(TRIP-Set) of DCTRL
(TRIP-Reset) of DCTRL
Digital input signals of DCTRL
Display only
9300POSBA1098
11-37
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C0879
1 Reset C135
2 Reset AIF
3 Reset CAN
[C0885]
CFG: R
[C0886]
CFG: L
C0889
1 DIS: R
2 DIS: L
[C0890] CFG: N-SET
1000
1000
[C0891] CFG: M-ADD

30021
[C0892] CFG: LO-M-LIM
5700
[C0893] CFG: HI-M-LIM
19523
[C0894] CFG: PHI-SET
30020
[C0895] CFG: PHI-LIM
19526
[C0896] CFG: N2-LIM
1000
[C0897] CFG: PHI-ON
1001
[C0898] CFG: FLD-WEAK
1006
[C0899] CFG: N/M-SWT
1000
[C0900] CFG: QSP

DIGIN 1
DIGIN 2

FIXED 0
1006

FIXED 0
[C0903] CFG: P-ADAPT
-199.99
{0.01 %}
- C0879 = 1 performs
one reset

(CCW) of CW/CCW/Q
(CCW rotation) of R/L/Q

NSET-NOUT
FIXED 0%
ANEG1-OUT
FCODE-472/3
FIXED 0INC
FIXED 100%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0
FIXED 100%
FIXED 0
1000
[C0902] CFG: I-LOAD
9300POSBA1098
Reset of control words
No reset
Reset
1000
[C0901] CFG: I-SET
11-38
0
1

R/L/Q-QSP
FIXED 0%
1000
DIS: N-SET
DIS: M-ADD
DIS: LO-M-LIM
DIS: HI-M-LIM
DIS: PHI-LIM
DIS: N2-LIM
DIS: FLD-WEAK
DIS: I-SET
Info
Digital input signals of R/L/Q
30020
C0906
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IMPORTANT
Selection
Display only
Configuration speed setpoint

input motor control MCTRL
Configuration torque setpoint
input of MCTRL
Configuration lower torque
limit of MCTRL
Configuration upper torque
limit of MCTRL
Configuration rotor position
setpoint of MCTRL
Configuration phase controller
limit of MCTRL
Configuration 2nd speed limitation value of MCTRL
Configuration switch-on signal
phase controller of MCTRL
Configuration signal for field
weakening of MCTRL
Configuration change-over
between speed control and
torque control MCTRL
Configuration control signal to
activate QSP of MCTRL
Configuration Load I-component of the MCTRL speed controller
Configuration release signal to
load the I-component of the
MCTRL speed controller
Configuration adaptation phase
controller
199.99
Analog input signals of MCTRL Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C0907
1
2
3
4
C0908
DIS: PHI-ON
DIS: N/M-SWT
DIS: QSP
DIS: I-LOAD
DIS: PHI-SET
-2147483647 {1 inc} 2147483647 Set phase signal of MCTRL
C0940 Numerator
C0941 Denominator
[C0942] CFG: IN
1
1
1000
C0943 DIS: IN
1
1
1000
C0948 DIS: IN
C0950 Numerator
C0951 Denominator
[C0952] CFG: IN
1
1
1000
C0953 DIS: IN
C0955 Numerator
C0956 Denominator
[C0957] CFG: IN
Info
Digital input signals of MCTRL Display only
C0909 Speed limit
C0945 Numerator
C0946 Denominator
[C0947] CFG: IN
IMPORTANT
Selection
1
1
1000
C0958 DIS: IN
1
+ /- 175 %
2
0 .. + 175 %
3
-175 .. 0 %
-32767
{1}
1
{1}
FIXED 0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
-32767
{1}
1
{1}
FIXED 0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
-32767
{1}
1
{1}
FIXED PHI0
-32767
{1 rpm}
-32767
{1}
1
{1}
FIXED PHI0
-32767
{1 rpm}
Display only
- 1 rev. = 65536 inc
Speed limitation for the MCTRL

speed setpoint
32767 Numerator for CONV1
32767 Denominator for CONV1
Configuration analog input
CONV1
CONV1
CONV2
Display only

CONV2
Display only

CONV3
32767 Absolute analog input signal of Display only
CONV3
CONV4
32767 Absolute analog input signal of Display only
CONV4
C0960 Function
1
C0961 y0
0.00
1
2
3
0.00
Function1
Function2
Function3
{0.01 %}
C0962 y1
50.00
0.00
{0.01 %}
199.99 Ordinate of the pair (x1/y1) of

CURVE1
C0963 y2
75.00
0.00
{0.01 %}
C0964 y100
100.00 0.00
{0.01 %}
199.99 Ordinate of the pair (x2/y2) of

CURVE1
199.99 Ordinate of the pair
(x = 100 %/y100) of CURVE1
C0965 x1
50.00
0.01
{0.01 %}
100.00 Abscissa of the pair (x1/y1) of

CURVE1
C0966 x2
75.00
0.01
{0.01 %}
99.00 Abscissa of the pair (x2/y2) of

CURVE1
Characteristic CURVE1-IN
199.99 Ordinate of the pair
(x = 0 %/y0) of CURVE1
9300POSBA1098
11-39
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
[C0967] CFG: IN
1000
C0968 DIS: IN
[C0990] CFG: IN
1000
[C0991] CFG: RESET
1000
C0992 DIS: IN
C0993 DIS: RESET
C0995 Division
[C0996] CFG: IN
1000
C0997 DIS: IN
C1000 Division
[C1001] CFG: IN
1
1000
C1002 DIS: IN
C1010 Function
[C1011]
1
2
C1012
1
2
C1020
[C1021]
1
2
C1022
1
2
C1025
11-40
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
ARITPH2 funct
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
ARITPH3 funct
9300POSBA1098
1000
1000
IMPORTANT
Selection
FIXED 0%
-199.99 {0.01 %}
FIXED PHI0
FIXED 0
-32767
{1}
-31
{1}
Info
Configuration characteristic
CURVE1-IN
199.99 Relative analog input signal of display only
CONV1
Configuration input phase integrator PHINT1
PHINT1
32767 Input signal of PHINT1
Digital input signal of PHINT1
31 Division factor of phase division PHDIV1

FIXED 0INC
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647
0
{1}
31
FIXED 0INC
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647
0
OUT = IN1
1
IN1 + IN2
2
IN1 - IN2
3
IN1 *IN2
14
IN1 / IN2
21
IN1 + IN2 (no limit)
22
IN1 - IN2 (no limit)
FIXED 0INC
FIXED 0INC
Configuration input phase division PHDIV1

Input signal of PHDIV1
Division factor
Configuration input of
CONVPHA1
Display only
Input signal of
CONVPHA1
Display only
Function of ARITPH1
Configuration inputs ARITPH1
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647 Input signals ARITPH1

1
1000
1000
0
1
2
3
14
OUT = IN1
IN1 + IN2
IN1 - IN2
IN1 *IN2
IN1 / IN2
100
{1}
0
1
2
3
14
OUT = IN1
IN1 + IN2
IN1 - IN2
IN1 *IN2
IN1 / IN2
Display only
ARITPH2 function
25103 CFG: ARITPH2-IN
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647 DIS: ARITPH2-IN

1
Display
p y onlyy
ARITPH3 function
Display only
Appendix
Code
[C1026]
1
2
C1027
1
2
C1090
C1091
C1092
C1093
C1094
C1095
[C1096]
LCD
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
Output signal
Code
Subcode
Numerator
Denomiator
Offset
CFG: IN
Possible settings
Selection
1000
1000
100
{1}
[C1101]
1
2
[C1102]
1
2
3
C1103
1
2
C1104
1
2
3
C1105
[C1106]
1
2
[C1107]
1
2
3
C1108
1
2
CFG: LOAD
CFG: BUSY-IN
CFG: FAIL-IN
DIS: IN
Info
-2147483648 {1} 2147483647 DIS: ARITPH3-IN
141
0
1.0000
0.0001
0
1000
[C1097]
1
2
3
C1098
C1099
1
2
3
C1100
IMPORTANT
Lenze
1000
1000
1000
-2147483648 {1} 2147483647 Output signal of FEVAN1

2
{1}
2000 Code for FEVAN1
0
{1}
255 Subcode for FEVAN1
0.0001
{0.0001} 100000.0000 FEVAN1 numerator
0.0001
{1} 100000.0000 FEVAN1 denominator
0
{1} 1000000000 FEVAN1 offset
FEVAN1
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0
-32768
DIS: LOAD
DIS: BUSY-IN
DIS: FAIL-IN
Function
CFG: LD-VAL
CFG: CMP-VAL
1000
1000
CFG: CLKUP
CFG: CLKDWN
CFG: LOAD
1000
1000
1000
{1}

FEVAN1
32767 Analog input signal of FEVAN1

Digital input signal of FEVAN1
DIS: LD-VAL
DIS: CMP-VAL
Display only
1
Return
2
Hold
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
FIXED 0
-32768
{1}
Display only
Function of FCNT1
FCNT1

FCNT1
32768 Analog input signals of FCNT1

Display only
DIS: CLKUP
DIS: CLKDWN
DIS: LOAD
Function
1
2
CFG: LD-VAL
CFG: CMP-VAL
1000
1000
50
{1}
25104 CFG: FCNT2-LD-VAL
CFG: CLKUP
CFG: CLKDWN
CFG: LOAD
1000
1000
1000
50
{1}
25132
-32767
32767 DIS: FCNT2-LD-VAL
DIS: LD-VAL
DIS: CMP-VAL
Digital input signals of FCNT1

Return
Hold
{1}
FCNT2 function
CFG: FCNT2-CLKUP
Display only
9300POSBA1098
11-41
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C1109
1
2
3
C1110
[C1111]
1
2
[C1112]
1
2
3
C1113
1
2
C1114
1
2
3
C1120
1
2
CFG: LD-VAL
CFG: CMP-VAL
1000
1000
50
{1}
25104 CFG: FCNT3-LD-VAL
CFG: CLKUP
CFG: CLKDWN
CFG: LOAD
1000
1000
1000
51
{1}
25132
DIS: LD-VAL
DIS: CMP-VAL
-32767
DIS: CLKUP
DIS: CLKDWN
DIS: LOAD
Sync mode
Return
Hold
{1}
DIS: FCNT2-CLKUP
Display only
FCNT3 function
CFG: FCNT3-CLKUP
Display parameter
32767 DIS: FCNT3-LD-VAL
Display only
2 Interpol. cycl
C1123
1 Phase shift
0
0
[C1124] CFG: IN1

1000
[C1125] CFG: IN2
1000
[C1126] CFG: IN3
1000
DIS: IN1
DIS: IN2
DIS: IN3
9300POSBA1098
Off
CAN sync
Terminal sync
{1 ms}
0.460
CFG: NUM
CFG: DEN
0
1
2
0
C1122 Sync time
2 Sync Window
11-42
Info
DIS: CLKUP
DIS: CLKDWN
DIS: LOAD
Function
[C1121]
1 Sync cycle
C1127
C1128
C1129
[C1130]
1
2
IMPORTANT
Selection
1000
1000
0.000
{0.001 ms}
-1.000
{0.001 ms}
0.000
{0.001 ms}
Function of SYNC1
13 SYNC1
Definition of the cycle time of For SYSTEMBUS only
the sync signals (in the slave)
Definition of the interpolation - Only for terminal
time between the sync signals - The interpolation is re(in the slave)
started with every sync
signal
10.000 Phase shift between the CAN - For SYSTEMBUS only
sync and internal control pro- - Depending on the
gram cycle
baud rate and bus load
1.000 Phase shift between terminal
sync and internal control pro- Only for terminal sync
gram cycle
1.000 Window for the synchroni- Only for terminal sync
zation edge of the terminal
- Activates when the
sync (LOW/HIGH edge)
sync start window is
quit
Configuration input of SYNC1

FIXED 0INC
FIXED 0INC
FIXED 0INC
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647
50
{1}
DIS: FCNT3-CLKUP
25104

Input signal of SYNC1
CFG: CONVPHPH2-NUM
Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
[C1131] CFG: ACT
Lenze
1000
[C1132] CFG: IN
1000
C1135
1
2
C1136
C1137
[C1160]
1
2
[C1161]
C1162
1
2
C1163
[C1165]
1
2
[C1166]
C1167
1
2
C1168
C1180
IMPORTANT
Selection
51
{1}
50
{1}
Info
25132 CFG: CONVPHPH2-ACT
-32767
32767
25104 CFG: CONVPHPH2-IN

DIS: CONVPHPH2-NUM
DIS: NUM
DIS: DEN
DIS: ACT
DIS: IN
{1}
Display only
0
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
CFG: SET
1000
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: SET
1 DIS: CONVPHPH2-ACT
-2147483647{1 incr}2147483647 DIS: CONVPHPH2-IN
ASW3
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
ASW3
FIXED 0
-199.99
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
CFG: SET
1000
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: SET
Ident Mode
199.99 Analog input signals of ASW3
{0.01 %}
Display only

ASW4

FIXED 0%
FIXED 0%
FIXED 0
-199.99
{0.01 %}

ASW4
199.99 Analog input signals of ASW4
0
1
Inactive
Calculate
2
3
Identify
Ident&calc.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Inactive
Busy
Error: No calculation
Error: No identification
Error: C0057 small
Error: n < > 0
Error: RSP
Error: C1185 big
Error: Overtime
Error: Bad condition
Wait for start
11
12
Motion
Wait for RSP
99
Error: internal
C1181 id State
Display only

Identification of control parameters
Not activated
Calculate control parameters
from data set
Identify only parameters
Calculate only parameters for
control system and control
Status of control parameters
Identification
Inactive
Busy
Error, see also chapter 5.11.2,
Causes of faults and
remedy, see page 5-31.
Waiting for enable to start the

movement
Waiting for end of movement
Waiting for controller inhibit for
completion
Internal error
9300POSBA1098
11-43
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
C1182 phi-id phase
Selection
0.5
{0.1 }
C1183 n-id max
100
10
{1 %}
100 nmax
C1184 M-id max
100
10
{1 %}
100 mmax
Identifcation of control parameters
C1185 M risetime
C1186 Optimize id
100
0
C1187 Inertia
C1188 Friction
0
0
10
0
1
0
0
C1190 Mot. PTC-Sel.
0
1
Standard
Characterist.
Char.: temp 1
Char.: temp 2
100
150
{1 C}
Char.: OHM 1
Char.: OHM 2
CFG: OUT.D2
1670
2225
{1 W}
C1191
1
2
C1192
1
2
[C1195]
Info
3000 phimax
{1 ms}
10000
Optimum control
Fault
{0.1 kg/cm2} 214000
{1 %}
100
0
1
C1207
1 fdbk rat num
2 fdbk rat den
1
1
C1208 Act polarity
0
1
DIS: OUT.D2
DIS: IN.D2
Ratio num.
Ratio denum.
Feed constant
C1205 Pos. resolut.
[C1206] Set polarity
9300POSBA1098
Inertia
Friction load component
(n-prop.)
PTC selection for motor
Selection of PTC resistance

30000 characteristic
1
1
1
C1196
C1197
C1202
C1203
C1204
M acceleration time
Optimization
Selection of PTC temperature

255 characteristic

FIXED 0INC
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647
-2147483647 {1} 2147483647
1
{1}
65535
1
{1}
65535
0.0001 {0.0001}
214000
1000
11-44
IMPORTANT
Lenze
100
Configuration input phase

signal of AIF
Input signal of AIF

Display only
AIF-IN.D2
Gearbox factor numerator
Gearbox factor denominator
Feed constant
Feed of the machine in unit per
revolution of the load side of
the gearbox.
{0.0001 incr/unit} 214000
The position resolution
indicates the number of
increments which
Display parameter
resolves a unit determiPosition resolution
ned by the user.
Display only
Not inverse
Polarity position setpoint
Reversal of the positioning direction
Inverse
Gearbox factor between
motor and position enco{1}
65335
der. Numerator/denomiPosition encoder gearbox
nator corresponds to
factor
motor speed/encoder
speed. Encoder to motor
shaft 1/1.
Not inverse
Inverse
Polarity actual position
Inversion of the actual

position, e.g. when using
a separate position encoder behind the gearbox.
Appendix
Code
LCD
C1209 Ref end-point
C1210 Pos. mode
C1211 Start PS No.
Possible settings
Lenze
0
IMPORTANT
Selection
0
Ref-point
1
Real-0
61
VTPOS-No 060
71
VTPOS-No 070
101
VTPOS-No 100
0
Absolute Pos
1
Relative Pos
2
Abs.Pos/Store
{1}
Info
Homing end point
Positioning mode
32
Start-PS No.
C1212 Act. PS No.
0
1
2
3
...
31
32
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
Prog. end
PS 01
PS 02
PS 03
PS 31
PS 32
+Home
-Home
+LIM,-home
-LIM,+home
+ MARK,-home
-MARK,+home
+MARK,+TP
-MARK,-TP
+TP
-TP
+ LIM,-TP
-LIM,+TP
TP-IN= E01
TP-IN= E02
TP-IN= E03
TP-IN= E04
C1213 Ref. mode
C1214 Ref TP-Input
C1215
1 TP-Trans
... ...
4 TP-Trans
0
...
0
0
1
+Slope
-Slope
C1216 V-Ref2 activ.
0
1
Inactive
Active
C1218
1 Fol.tolerance
2 Fol.tolerance
4.0000 0
1.0000
Momentary PS No.
Point where the drive is

to be positioned after
homing
With absolute positioning, relative as well as
absolute positionings are
possible. With relative
positioning however,
only relative positionings
are possible.
Program set No. at which
the positioning program
is processed after the
edge at the
PRG-START input.
Display of the momentary

program set No. or
operating mode
Homing mode
Mode for homing (valid

for manual mode and
program homing)
Homing touch probe
Selection of the touch

probe input terminal for
homing acc. to modes 6
to 9. When using an
incremental encoder, the
TP input E04 is particularly suitable.
TP input edge
Selection of the edge for

the touch probe input
terminals (valid for
homing acc. to modes 6
to 9, TP positioning, TP
storing).
Activation of 2nd homing

speed
Contouring error tolerance
{0.0001 units}
214000
9300POSBA1098
11-45
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C1220
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C1221
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[C1223]
[C1224]
C1225
C1227
C1240
C1241
C1242
C1243
C1245
1
2
3
C1250
Info
POS-TARGET
POS-SETPOS
POS-ACTPOS
Act.followErr
ACTPOS abs.
REFMARK 0-Imp
Act.home offs
Act.home pos.
-214000 {0.0001 units} 214000
POS-TARGET
POS-SETPOS
POS-ACTPOS
Act.followErr
ACTPOS abs.
REFMARK 0-Imp
Act.home offs
Act.home pos.
Pos. limit+
Pos. limitHome offset
Home position
v-max
v-homing 2
v-homing
v-manual
-2147483647 {1 incr} 2147483647
POS-VSET
POS-VTRAV
POS-VFINAL
a-max
Momentary position target
Display only
Momentary position target
16000
-16000
0
0
50
2
5
5
0
{0.0001 units}
-214000 {0.0001 units}
-214000{0.0001 units}
-214000{0.0001 units}
0.0001{0.0001units/s}
0.01 {0.01 % vmax}
0.01 {0.01 % vmax}
0.01 {0.01 % vmax}
214000
0
214000
214000
214000
100
100
100
Position limit positive

Position limit negative
Homing measure offset
Home position
vmax, maximum speed
Second homing speed
Homing speed
Manual speed
-199.99 {0.01 % vmax} 199.99 POS-VSET, momentary speed

setpoint
100
0.0001 {0.0001 units/s2}

amax, maximum acceleration/
214000 deceleration
C1251 a-homing
10
0.01
{0.01 % amax}
100 Homing acceleration/deceleration
C1252 a-manual
10
0.01
{0.01 % amax}
100 Manual acceleration/deceleration
C1253
C1255
1
2
3
C1256
C1257
C1260
100
0.01
{0.01 % amax}
100 PS-CANCEL delay
C1261
1
...
16
C1280
11-46
IMPORTANT
Selection
a-cancel
POS-ASET
POS-ACC
POS-DCC
S-RMP: Jerk
S-RMP: filter
Manual mode
1
10
0
0.064
0
0
1
Manu-stp-No
...
Manu-stp-No
Pos. control
0
...
15
0
0
{1}
9300POSBA1098
-199.99 {0.01 % amax} 199.99 POS_ASET, momentary acceleration/deceleration
{0.001 s}
{1 rpm}
No stop
With stop
{1}
10 S-ramp: jerkmax
1000 S-ramp: PARAM-RD filter
Manual mode
104 Intermediate stop target

(No. in VTPOS)
65535 Control word positioning
Display only
Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C1283 Pos. status
C1284 Homing-status
C1285
1
2
3
4
C1286
1
2
Selection
0
Program mode
5
Rdy to start
10
Started
11
Started-dig
12
Started-rem
20
Program end
25
Stopped-dig
26
Stopped-rem
30
STDBY mode
35
Reset-dig
36
Reset-rem
50
Manual-dig
51
Manual-rem
55
Manu-neg-dig
56
Manu-neg-rem
57
Manu-pos-dig
58
Manu-pos-rem
59
Neg+ pos activ
62
Manu-ref-dig
63
Manu-ref-rem
80
POS-LOOP-INH
85
POS-PSET-SWT
0
Not REF-OK
1
REF-OK
5
Homing by prg
10
Manu-ref-dig
11
Manu-ref-1280
20
Abs encoder
25
Ext abs encod
IMPORTANT
Info
Positioning state
Display only
Homing state
MONIT P01
MONIT P02
MONIT P04
MONIT P05
4
4
4
4
0
4
TRIP
Fail-QSP
MONIT P14
MONIT P15
4
3
0
2
3
4
TRIP
Warn
Off
Fail-QSP
C1287
1 MONIT P06
0
4
TRIP
Fail-QSP
Conf. P06 (no reference)
C1288
1 MONIT P12
0
4
TRIP
Fail-QSP
Conf. P12 (encoder range)
C1289
1 MONIT P17
2 MONIT P18
4
4
0
2
3
4
TRIP
Warn
Off
Fail-QSP
Conf. P01
(limit switch negative)
Conf. P14 (contouring error 1)
Conf.
P17 (TP control)
P18 (range of representation
limited/exceeded, position
limits, speeds)
9300POSBA1098
11-47
Appendix
Code
LCD
C1290
1 MONIT P16
C1291
1
2
3
C1299
1
...
32
C1301
1
...
60
C1302
1
2
...
10
...
30
C1303
1
2
...
10
...
30
C1304
1
...
30
C1305
1
...
30
11-48
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze
Selection
Info
0
2
3
4
TRIP
Warn
Off
Fail-QSP
Conf. P16 (Sync error)
MONIT P07
MONIT P08
MONIT P09
4
4
4
0
4
TRIP
Fail-QSP
Act. CNT
...
Act. CNT
0
...
0
{1 pcs}
VTPOS-value
...
VTPOS-value
0
...
0
-214000{0.0001 units} 214000
VTVEL-value
VTVEL-value
...
VTVEL-value
...
VTVEL-value
10
20
...
100
...
100
0.01
VTACC-value
VTACC-value
...
VTACC-value
...
VTACC-value
10
20
...
100
...
100
0.01
VTPCS-value
...
VTPCS-value
1
...
30
{1 pcs}
65535
VTTIME-value
...
VTTIME-value
1
...
30
{0.001 s}
65.535
9300POSBA1098
{0.01 % vmax}
Conf. P07 (PS mode error)
65535
Current state of piece counter
Input VTPOS position value
100
Input VTVEL speeds
{0.01 % amax}
100
Input VTACC accel./decelerations
Input VTPCS piece numbers
Input VTTIME waiting times
Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
C1311
1 PS mode
... ...
32 PS mode
C1312
1
...
32
C1313
1
...
32
C1314
1
...
32
C1315
1
...
32
C1316
1
...
32
Possible settings
Lenze
Selection
0
...
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
16
30
31
32
33
34
No pos-funct.
Absolute PS
Relative PS
Homing
Set home pos.
Set target
Abs.TP-PS E01
Abs.TP-PS E02
Abs.TP-PS E03
Abs.TP-PS E04
Rel.TP-PS E01
Rel.TP-PS E02
Rel.TP-PS E03
Rel.TP-PS E04
Set Ref-Pos.
STDBY
STDBY-TP1
STDBY-TP2
STDBY-TP3
STDBY-TP4
IMPORTANT
Info
Program set mode
Target-No
...
Target-No
0
...
0
0
{1}
V-Travel-No
...
V-Travel-No
0
...
0
0
{1}
34 PS positioning speed
(No. in VTVEL)
ACC-No
...
ACC-No
0
...
0
0
{1}
34 PS acceleration
(No. in VTACC)
DCC-No
...
DCC-No
0
...
0
0
{1}
34 PS deceleration
(No. in VTACC)
V-Final-No
...
V-Final-No
0
...
0
0
{1}
34 PS final speed
(No. in VTVEL)
0
...
0
0
1
2
3
...
31
32
PFI 31
PFI 32
0
1
0-Level
1-Level
C1318
1 Wait-PFI-No
... ...
32 Wait-PFI-No
C1319
1 Wait-Level
... ...
32 Wait-Level
0
...
0
Inactive
PFI 01
PFI 02
PFI 03
104 PS position target

(No. in VTPOS)
Wait for PFI

(No. of the PFI)
Level for Wait-PFI
9300POSBA1098
11-49
Appendix
Code
LCD
C1320
1 PFO1-No
... ...
32 PFO1-No
11-50
Possible settings
Lenze
Selection
0
...
0
0
1
2
3
...
31
32
100
101
102
103
104
PFO 31
PFO 32
All PFOs
PFO 01..08
PFO 09..16
PFO 17..24
PFO 25..32
Inactive
PFO 01
PFO 02
PFO 03
C1321
1 PFO1-Level
... ...
32 PFO1-Level
0
...
0
0
1
0-Level
1-Level
C1322
1 PFO2-No
... ...
32 PFO2-No
0
...
0
0
1
2
3
...
31
32
100
101
102
103
104
Inactive
PFO 01
PFO 02
PFO 03
PFO 31
PFO 32
All PFOs
PFO 01..08
PFO 09..16
PFO 17..24
PFO 25..32
0
1
0-Level
1-Level
C1323
1 PFO2-Level
... ...
32 PFO2-Level
0
...
0
C1324
1 WaitTIME-No
... ...
32 WaitTIME-No
0
...
0
C1325
1 JMP1-PFI-No
... ...
32 JMP1-PFI-No
0
...
0
C1326
1 JMP1-Level
... ...
32 JMP1-Level
0
...
0
C1327
1 JMP1-PS
... ...
32 JMP1-PS
0
...
0
9300POSBA1098
IMPORTANT
Info
0
{1}
0
1
2
...
32
PFI 32
0
1
0-Level
1-Level
First switching PFO

(No. of the PFO)
First switching PFO level

Second switching PFO
(No. of the PFO)
Program function output 2: Set an output after

positioning
Second switching PFO level

34
Waiting time (No. in VTTIME)
Inactive
PFI 01
PFI 02
0
{1}
Program function output 1: Set an output

before positioning
JMP1: PFI No.
Number of a PFI for

branch 1
JMP1: PFI level
Level of a PFI for

branch 1
JMP1: PS No.
Branch 1 to program set

No. (PS)
Input of the program set
No.
32
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C1328
1 JMP-PCS-No
... ...
32 JMP-PCS-No
0
...
0
C1329
1 JMP-PCS-PS
... ...
32 JMP-PCS-PS
0
...
0
C1330
1 TP window
... ...
32 TP window
0
...
0
C1331
1 TP distance
... ...
32 TP distance
0
...
0
C1333
1 JMP-TP-PS
... ...
32 JMP-TP-PS
0
...
0
C1334
1 JMP2-PFI-No
... ...
32 JMP2-PFI-No
0
...
0
Selection
0
{1}
0
{1}
IMPORTANT
Info
34
32
JMP-PCS-PS: PS No.
0
{1}
104
0
{1}
104
0
{1}
32
0
1
2
...
32
PFI 32
0-Level
1-Level
TP window (No. in VTPOS)
TP final distance
(No. in VTPOS)
inactive
PFI 01
PFI 02
C1335
1 JMP2-Level
... ...
32 JMP2-Level
0
...
0
0
1
C1336
1 JMP2-PS
... ...
32 JMP2-PS
0
...
0
0
{1}
32
0
{1}
32
C1349
1
...
32
[C1350]
1
...
10
C1351
1
...
10
[C1352]
1
...
4
JMP-PS
...
JMP-PS
JMP-PCS No.:
Set piece number (No. in
VTPCS)
Selection of a set piece

number from VTPCS for
the piece number repeat
function
Branch PCS if selected
piece number from
VTPCS was not yet
reached. Input of the
program set No.
Selection of a range window for TP. Within this
range, the TP is activated.
Selection of a final
distance from VTPOS for
TP.
JMP-TP: PS No.
Branch TP if no touch
probe has occurred
before the position target
(1312) was reached.
No.
JMP2: PFI No.
Number of a PFI for

branch 2
JMP2: PFI level
Level of a PFI for

branch 1
JMP2: PS No.
Branch 2 to program set

No. (PS).
No.
JMP: PS No.
Unconditioned branch to
PS No.

CFG: VTPOS-IN
...
CFG: VTPOS-IN
1000
...
1000
DIS: VTPOS-IN
...
DIS: VTPOS-IN
CFG: VTPOS-IN
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647
DIS: VTPOS-IN
Display only

CFG: VTVEL-IN
...
CFG: VTVEL-IN
1000
...
1000
CFG: VTVEL-IN
9300POSBA1098
11-51
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C1353
1
...
4
[C1354]
1
...
4
C1355
1
...
4
[C1356]
1
...
4
C1357
1
...
4
C1358
1
...
4
C1359
1
...
4
[C1360]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
11-52
DIS: VTVEL-IN
...
DIS: VTVEL-IN
IMPORTANT
Selection
Info
-2147483647{1} 2147483647
DIS: VTVEL-IN
Display only

CFG: VTACC-IN
...
CFG: VTACC-IN
1000
...
1000
DIS: VTACC-IN
...
DIS: VTACC-IN
CFG: VTACC-IN
-2147483647{1} 2147483647
DIS: VTACC-IN
Display only

CFG: VTPCS-IN
...
CFG: VTPCS-IN
1000
...
1000
DIS: VTPCS-IN
...
DIS: VTPCS-IN
CFG: VTPCS-IN
-32768
{1}
32767
DIS: VTPCS-IN
Display only

CFG:VTTIME-IN
...
CFG:VTTIME-IN
1000
...
1000
DIS:VTTIME-IN
...
DIS:VTTIME-IN
CFG: VTTIME-IN
-32768
{1}

CFG:PRG-START
CFG:PRG-STOP
CFG:PRG-RESET
CFG:LIM-NEG
CFG:LIM-POS
CFG:MANUAL
CFG:MANU-NEG
CFG:MANU-POS
CFG:MANU-REF
CFG:REF-MARK
CFG:TP1-ENABL
CFG:TP2-ENABL
CFG:TP3-ENABL
CFG:TP4-ENABL
CFG:PS-CANCEL
CFG:STDBY-STP
CFG:S-RAMPS
CFG:PARAM-RD
CFG:LOOP-INH
CFG:PSET-SWT
CFG:ABS-SET
CFG:WAITSTATE
9300POSBA1098
53
20201
55
51
52
55
20202
20203
20204
54
1000
1000
1000
1000
20208
20205
19522
20206
20207
1000
1000
1000
32767
DIS: VTTIME-IN
CFG: POS-PRG-START
Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C1361
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
[C1362]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C1363
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[C1364]
1
2
3
C1365
1
2
3
IMPORTANT
Selection
Info
DIS:PRG-START
DIS:PRG-STOP
DIS:PRG-RESET
DIS:LIM-NEG
DIS:LIM-POS
DIS:MANUAL
DIS:MANU-NEG
DIS:MANU-POS
DIS:MANU-REF
DIS:REF-MARK
DIS:ENABL-TP1
DIS:ENABL-TP2
DIS:ENABL-TP3
DIS:ENABL-TP4
DIS:PS-CANCEL
DIS:STDBY-STP
DIS:S-RAMPS
DIS:PARAM-RD
DIS:LOOP-INH
DIS:PSET-SWT
DIS:ABS-SET
DIS:WAITSTATE
CFG:START-PS
CFG:V-OVERRID
CFG:A-OVERRID
CFG:N-IN
CFG:NOUT-GAIN
CFG:M-IN
CFG:MOUT-GAIN
CFG:JERK-RED
DIS: POS-PRG-START
19517
1006
1006
1000
1006
1000
1000
1006
DIS:START-PS
DIS:V-OVERRID
DIS:A-OVERRID
DIS:N-IN
DIS:NOUT-GAIN
DIS:M-IN
DIS:MOUT-GAIN
DIS:JERK-RED
CFG:PSET-EXT
CFG:ABS-IN
CFG:P-IN
DIS:PSET-EXT
DIS:ABS-IN
DIS:P-IN
50
{1}
25104
CFG: POS-START-PS
-32768
{1}
32767
DIS: POS-START-PS
1000
5000
1000
Display only
100
{1}
25103
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647
Display only
CFG: POS-PSET-EXT
DIS: POS-PSET-EXT
Display only
9300POSBA1098
11-53
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
[C1370]
1
2
...
30
31
32
C1371
1
2
C1372
1
2
C1380
1
...
104
C1381
1
...
104
C1382
1
...
34
C1383
1
...
34
C1384
1
...
34
C1385
1
...
34
C1386
1
...
34
C1387
1
...
34
[C1400]
1
2
3
4
11-54
CFG:PFI
CFG:PFI
...
CFG:PFI
CFG:PFI
CFG:PFI
IMPORTANT
Selection
Info
20201
20202
...
20230
53
54
CFG: POS-PFI
DIS: PFI-LOW
DIS: PFI-HIGH
{1 hex}
65535 DIS: POS-PFI-LOW (01..16)
DIS: PFO-LOW
DIS: PFO-HIGH
{1 hex}
65535 DIS: POS-PFO-LOW (01..16)
DIS: VTPOS
...
DIS: VTPOS
-214000{0.0001 units} 214000
DIS: VTPOS
...
DIS: VTPOS
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647
DIS: VTVEL
...
DIS: VTVEL
0.01
DIS: VTVEL
...
DIS: VTVEL
-2147483647{1 x/T} 2147483647
DIS: VTACC
...
DIS: VTACC
0.01
DIS: VTACC
...
DIS: VTACC
-2147483647{1 x/T2} 2147483647
DIS: VTPCS
...
DIS: VTPCS
{1 pcs}
65535
DIS: VTTIME
...
DIS: VTTIME
{0.001 s}
65535
CFG: SET
CFG: NEXT
CFG: CLR
CFG: LOAD
9300POSBA1098
1000
1000
1000
1000
{0.01 % vmax}
{0.01 % amax}
5
{1}
100
100
DIS: VTPOS (01..104)
DIS: VTPOS (01..104)
DIS: VTVEL (01..34)
Display only
DIS: VTVEL (01..34)
DIS: VTACC (01..34)
DIS: VTACC (01..34)
DIS: VTPCS (01..34)
DIS: VTTIME (01..34)
25132
CFG: TEACH1-SET
Appendix
Code
LCD
[C1401]
1 CFG: L-IN
C1402
1
2
3
4
C1403
C1404
1
[C1405]
1
C1406
1
C1500
C1501
C1502
C1503
C1504
C1505
[C1506]
[C1507]
1
2
3
C1508
C1509
1
2
3
C1510
C1511
C1512
C1513
C1514
C1515
[C1516]
[C1517]
1
2
3
C1518
C1519
1
2
3
C1520
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze
Selection
Info
CFG: TEACH1-L-IN
1000
100
{1}
25103
DIS: TEACH1-SET
DIS: SET
DIS: NEXT
DIS: CLR
DIS: LOAD
DIS: CNT
-2147483647{1} 2147483647
DIS: L-IN
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647
Display only
0
{1}
65535 DIS: TEACH1-CNT

DIS: TEACH1-L-IN
CFG: TEACH1-LDVAL
CFG: LDVAL
1000
50
{1}
25104
DIS: LDVAL
Output signal
Code
Subcode
Numerator
Denominator
Offset
CFG: IN
-32768
{1}
32768
-2147483647{1} 2147483647
141
2
{1}
2000
0
0
{1}
255
1
0
{1}
100000
0.0001 0.0001 {0.0001}
100000
0
0
{1} 1000000000
1000
50
{1}
25104
CFG: LOAD
CFG: BUSY-IN
CFG: FAIL-IN
DIS: IN
1000
1000
1000
DIS: TEACH1-LDVAL
DIS: LOAD
DIS: BUSY-IN
DIS: FAIL-IN
Output signal
Code
Subcode
Numerator
Denominator
Offset
CFG: IN
CFG: LOAD
CFG: BUSY-IN
CFG: FAIL-IN
DIS: IN
DIS: LOAD
DIS: BUSY-IN
DIS: FAIL-IN
Output signal
1000
1000
1000
CFG: FEVAN2-IN
51
{1}
25132
-32768
32768 DIS: FEVAN2-IN
{1}
141
0
1
0.0001
0
1000
Display only
Signal output
FEVAN2 code
FEVAN2 subcode
FEVAN2 numerator
FEVAN2 denominator
FEVAN2 offset
-2147483647{1} 2147483647
2
{1}
2000
0
{1}
255
0
{1}
100000
0.0001 {0.0001}
100000
0
{1} 1000000000
50
{1}
25104
CFG: FEVAN2-LOAD
DIS: FEVAN2-LOAD
Signal output
FEVAN3 Code
FEVAN3 Subcode
FEVAN3 numerator
FEVAN3 denominator
FEVAN3 Offset
CFG: FEVAN3-IN
51
{1}
25132
-32768

DIS: FEVAN3-LOAD
1
{1}
Display only
CFG: FEVAN3-LOAD
Display only
-2147483647{1} 2147483647 Signal output
9300POSBA1098
11-55
Appendix
Code
C1521
C1522
C1523
C1524
C1525
[C1526]
[C1527]
1
2
3
C1528
C1529
1
2
3
C1530
C1531
C1532
C1533
C1534
C1535
[C1536]
[C1537]
1
2
3
C1538
C1539
1
2
3
C1540
C1541
C1542
C1543
C1544
C1545
[C1546]
[C1547]
1
2
3
C1548
C1549
1
2
3
11-56
LCD
Possible settings
Code
Subcode
Numerator
Denominator
Offset
CFG: IN
Lenze
141
0
1
0.0001
0
1000
Selection
2
{1}
2000
0
{1}
255
0
{1}
100000
0.0001 {0.0001}
100000
0
{1} 1000000000
50
{1}
25104
1000
1000
1000
51
{1}
25132
-32768
CFG: LOAD
CFG: BUSY-IN
CFG: FAIL-IN
DIS: IN
DIS: LOAD
DIS: BUSY-IN
DIS: FAIL-IN
Output signal
Code
Subcode
Numerator
Denominator
Offset
CFG: IN
CFG: LOAD
CFG: BUSY-IN
CFG: FAIL-IN
DIS: IN
DIS: LOAD
DIS: BUSY-IN
DIS: FAIL-IN
Output signal
Code
Subcode
Numerator
Denominator
Offset
CFG: IN
IMPORTANT
{1}
-2147483647{1} 2147483647
141
2
{1}
2000
0
0
{1}
255
1
0
{1}
100000
0.0001 0.0001 {0.0001}
100000
0
0
{1} 1000000000
1000
50
{1}
25104
1000
1000
1000
CFG: FEVAN4-LOAD
DIS: FEVAN4-LOAD
25132
-32768
{1}
-2147483647{1} 2147483647
2
{1}
2000
0
{1}
255
0
{1}
100000
0.0001 {0.0001}
100000
0
{1} 1000000000
50
{1}
25104
Display only
Signal output
FEVAN5 code
FEVAN5 subcode
FEVAN5 numerator
FEVAN5 denominator
FEVAN5 offset
CFG: FEVAN5-IN
51
{1}
141
0
1
0.0001
0
1000
Info
FEVAN4 code
FEVAN4 subcode
FEVAN4 numerator
FEVAN4 denominator
FEVAN4 offset
CFG: FEVAN4-IN
CFG: FEVAN5-LOAD
DIS: FEVAN5-LOAD
Display only
Signal output
FEVAN6 code
FEVAN6 subcode
FEVAN6 numerator
FEVAN6 denominator
FEVAN6 offset
CFG: FEVAN6-IN
CFG: FEVAN6-LOAD
CFG: LOAD
CFG: BUSY-IN
CFG: FAIL-IN
DIS: IN
DIS: LOAD
DIS: BUSY-IN
DIS: FAIL-IN
9300POSBA1098
1000
1000
1000
51
{1}
25132
-32768

DIS: FEVAN6-LOAD
1
{1}
Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
C1550 ARITPH4 funct
[C1551]
1
2
C1552
1
2
C1555
[C1556]
1
2
C1557
1
2
C1560
[C1561]
1
2
C1562
1
2
[C1570]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
C1571
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
ARITPH5 funct
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
ARITPH6 funct
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
Possible settings
Lenze
1
1000
1000
100
{1}
Info
ARITPH4 function
-2147483647{1} 2147483647 DIS: ARITPH4-IN

1
1000
1000
0
1
2
3
14
OUT = IN1
IN1 + IN2
IN1 - IN2
IN1 *IN2
IN1 / IN2
100
{1}
1000
1000
0
1
2
3
14
OUT = IN1
IN1 + IN2
IN1 - IN2
IN1 *IN2
IN1 / IN2
100
{1}
51
{1}
Display only
ARITPH6 function
-2147483647{1} 2147483647 DIS: ARITPH6-IN
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Display only
ARITPH5 function
-2147483647{1} 2147483647 DIS: ARITPH5-IN
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: B0
CFG: B1
CFG: B2
CFG: B3
CFG: B4
CFG: B5
CFG: B6
CFG: B7
CFG: B8
CFG: B9
CFG: B10
CFG: B11
CFG: B12
CFG: B13
CFG: B14
CFG: SIGN
DIS: result
IMPORTANT
Selection
0
OUT = IN1
1
IN1 + IN2
2
IN1 - IN2
3
IN1 *IN2
14
IN1 / IN2
Display only
25132
CFG: CONVDA1.B0
{1 hex}
65536 DIS: result
Display only
9300POSBA1098
11-57
Appendix
Code
[C1573]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
C1574
[C1576]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LCD
CFG: B0
CFG: B1
CFG: B2
CFG: B3
CFG: B4
CFG: B5
CFG: B6
CFG: B7
CFG: B8
CFG: B9
CFG: B10
CFG: B11
CFG: B12
CFG: B13
CFG: B14
CFG: SIGN
Selection
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
51
{1}
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
C1577 DIS: result

[C1580] CFG: IN
1000
C1581 DIS: IN
[C1582] CFG: IN
1000
DIS: IN
Numerator
Denominator
CFG: IN
C1594
C1595
C1596
[C1598]
DIS: IN
Numerator
Denominator
CFG: IN
9300POSBA1098
1
1
1000
1
1
1000
Info
25132
CFG: CONVDA2.B0
CFG: B0
CFG: B1
CFG: B2
CFG: B3
CFG: B4
CFG: B5
CFG: B6
CFG: B7
CFG: B8
CFG: B9
CFG: B10
CFG: B11
CFG: B12
CFG: B13
CFG: B14
CFG: SIGN
C1583
C1590
C1591
[C1593]
IMPORTANT
Lenze
DIS: result
C1599 DIS: IN
11-58
Possible settings
{1 hex}
51
{1}
65536 DIS: Result
Display only
25132
CFG: CONVDA3.B0
0
{1 hex}
50
{1}
-32768
{1}
50
{1}
-32768
{1}
-32768
{1}
1
{1}
50
{1}
-32768
{1}
-32768
{1}
1
{1}
50
{1}
-32768
{1}
65536 DIS: Result

25104 CFG: CONVAD1-IN
Display only
32768 DIS: CONVAD1-IN

25104 CFG: CONVAD2-IN
Display only
32768
32768
32768
25104
DIS: CONVAD2-IN
CONVAPH1 numerator
CONVAPH1 denominator
CFG: CONVAPH1-IN
Display only
32768
32768
32768
25104
DIS: CONVAPH1-IN
CONVAPH2 numerator
CFG: CONVAPH2-IN
Display only
32768 DIS: CONVAPH2-IN
Display only
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
C1600 Numerator
C1601 Denominator
[C1603] CFG: IN
Lenze
1
1
1000
C1604 DIS IN
C1610 Division
[C1611] CFG: IN
1
1000
C1612 DIS: IN
C1615 Division
[C1616] CFG: IN
C1617 DIS: IN
[C1640]
1 CFG: RESET
C1641
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SP-value 1-1
SP-value 1-2
SP-value 2-1
SP-value 2-2
SP-value 3-1
SP-value 3-2
SP-value 4-1
SP-value 4-2
SP-value 5-1
SP-value 5-2
SP-value 6-1
SP-value 6-2
SP-value 7-1
SP-value 7-2
SP-value 8-1
SP-value 8-2
[C1642]
1 CFG: L-IN
C1643
1 DIS: RESET
C1644
1 DIS: L-IN
C1645 Mode
[C1650]
1 CFG: RESET
1
1000
IMPORTANT
Selection
-32768
{1}
32768
1
{1}
32768
50
{1}
25104
-32768
{1}
32768
1
{1}
31
100
{1}
25103
-2147483647
{1 incr}
2147483647
1
{1}
31
100
{1}
25103
Info
CONVAPH3 numerator
CFG: CONVAPH3-IN
DIS: CONVAPH3-IN
Division factor
CFG: CONVPHA2-IN
Display only
DIS: CONVPHA2-IN
Display only
Division factor
CFG: CONVPHA3-IN
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647 DIS: CONVPHA3-IN
1000
51
{1}
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1
{1}
1000
100
{1}
Display only
25132 CFG: SP1-RESET
104
SP value for IN1-1
25103 CFG: SP1-L-IN

DIS: SP1-RESET
1
DIS: SP1-L-IN
Display only
-1073741824{1 incr} 1073741823
0
1
On / off
Centre/range
1000
51
{1}
SP1 mode
CFG: SP2-RESET
25132
9300POSBA1098
11-59
Appendix
Code
C1651
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LCD
SP-value 1-1
SP-value 1-2
SP-value 2-1
SP-value 2-2
SP-value 3-1
SP-value 3-2
SP-value 4-1
SP-value 4-2
SP-value 5-1
SP-value 5-2
SP-value 6-1
SP-value 6-2
SP-value 7-1
SP-value 7-2
SP-value 8-1
SP-value 8-2
[C1652]
1 CFG: L-IN
C1653
1 DIS: RESET
C1654
1 DIS: L-IN
C1655 Mode
C1657
1
...
4
C1658
C1659
Death time
...
Death time
Hysteresis
Filter
C1660 DIS: act.sel.

[C1661] CFG: SELECT
[C1662]
1
...
8
C1663
C1664
1
...
8
C1665
[C1666]
11-60
CFG: IN
...
CFG: IN
DIS: SELECT
DIS: IN
...
DIS: IN
DIS: act.sel.
CFG: SELECT
9300POSBA1098
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze
Selection
Info
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1
{1}
1000
100
{1}
104
SP value for IN1-1
25103 CFG: SP2-L-IN

DIS: SP2-RESET
1
DIS: SP2-L-IN
0
0
-1073741824{1 incr} 1073741823
0
...
0
0
1
-30000
1000
1000
...
1000
0
1
On / off
Centre/range
{1 ms}
SP2 mode
30000
SP2 dead time
-214000 {0.0001 units} 214000 SP2 hysteresis

0
Filter off
1
Filter 1 ms
2
Filter 2 ms
Filters
4
Filter 4 ms
8
Filter 8 ms
6
Filter 16 ms
0
{1}
50
{1}
8 DIS: Actual selection

25104 CFG: SELPH1-SELECT
50
{1}
25104
-32768
32768 DIS: SELPH1-SELECT
{1}
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647
1000
Display only
0
{1}
50
{1}
Display only
CFG: SELPH1-IN
DIS: SELPH1-IN
8 DIS: Actual selection

25104 CFG: SELPH2-SELECT
Display only
Appendix
Code
[C1667]
1
...
8
C1668
C1669
1
...
8
C1670
LCD
CFG: IN
...
CFG: IN
DIS: SELECT
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze
Selection
Info
1000
...
1000
50
{1}
25104
-32768
32768 DIS: SELPH2-SELECT
{1}
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647
DIS: IN
...
DIS: IN
Function
C1671
C1672
[C1673]
1
2
C1674
1
2
C1675
Hysteresis
Window
50
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
50
{1}
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
Function
C1676
C1677
[C1678]
1
2
C1679
1
2
C1680
Hysteresis
Window
50
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
50
{1}
C1681
C1682
[C1683]
1
2
C1684
1
2
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
Function
DIS: SELPH2-IN
25104 CFG: CMPPH1-IN
50
0
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
1000
1000
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display only
IN1 = IN2
IN1 > IN2
IN1 < IN2
CMPPH2 function
|IN1| = |IN2|
|IN1| > |IN2|
|IN1| < |IN2|
{1 incr} 1073741824 CMPPH2 hysteresis
{1 incr} 1073741824 CMPPH2 window
25104 CFG: CMPPH2-IN
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647 DIS: CMPPH2-IN
Display only
IN1 = IN2
IN1 > IN2
IN1 < IN2
CMPPH1 function
|IN1| = |IN2|
|IN1| > |IN2|
|IN1| < |IN2|
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647 DIS: CMPPH1-IN
Hysteresis
Window
DIS: IN
DIS: IN
CFG: SELPH2-IN
IN1 = IN2
IN1 > IN2
IN1 < IN2
|IN1| = |IN2|
|IN1| > |IN2|
|IN1| < |IN2|
Display only
CMPPH3 function
0
0

CFG: CMPPH3-IN
50
{1}
25104
DIS: CMPPH3-IN
Display only
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647
9300POSBA1098
11-61
Appendix
Code
[C1690]
1
...
10
C1691
1
...
10
C1692
1
...
10
C1693
1
...
10
[C1695]
1
...
10
C1696
1
...
10
C1700
1
2
C1701
C1702
C1703
C1704
C1705
C1706
C1707
[C1708]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11-62
LCD
Possible settings
IMPORTANT
Lenze
Selection
1000
...
1000
50
{1}
25104
DIS: IN (%)
...
DIS: IN (%)
-199.99 {0.01 %}
199.99
DIS: IN (val)
...
DIS: IN (val)
-32768
{1}
32768
DIS: IN (HEX)
...
DIS: IN (HEX)
{1 hex}
65536
CFG: IN
...
CFG: IN
CFG: IN
...
CFG: IN
1000
...
1000
Info
50
{1}
25104
CFG: DISA-IN
DIS: DISA-IN (%)
DIS: DISA-IN (value)
Display only
DIS: IN (HEX)
CFG: DISPH-IN
DIS: DISPH-IN
DIS: IN
...
DIS: IN
-2147483647{1 incr} 2147483647
Output signal
BCD result
Code
Subcode
Numerator
Denominator
Offset
BCD mode
-2147483647{1} 2147483647 Signal output

141
0
1
0.0001
0
0
BCD delay
10
CFG: READ
CFG: DATA1
CFG: DATA2
CFG: DATA3
CFG: DATA4
CFG: LOAD
CFG: BUSY-IN
CFG: FAIL-IN
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
9300POSBA1098
Display only
11
{1}
2000
0
{1}
255
0
{1}
100000
0.0001 {0.0001}
100000
0
{1} 1000000000
0
No hand-shake
1
With hand-shake
0
{1 ms}
255
51
{1}
BCD1 code
BCD1 subcode
BCD1 numerator
BCD1 denominator
BCD1 offset
BCD mode
BCD delay
25132
CFG: BCD1-READ
Appendix
Code
LCD
Possible settings
Lenze
C1709
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C1710
1
2
C1711
C1712
C1713
C1714
C1715
C1716
C1717
[C1718]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C1719
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C1720
1
2
C1721
C1722
C1723
C1724
C1725
C1726
IMPORTANT
Selection
Info
DIS: READ
DIS: DATA1
DIS: DATA2
DIS: DATA3
DIS: DATA4
DIS: LOAD
DIS: BUSY-IN
DIS: FAIL-IN
Output signal
BCD result
Code
Subcode
Numerator
Denominator
Offset
BCD mode
-2147483647{1} 2147483647 Signal output
DIS: BCD1-READ
Display only
141
0
1
0.0001
0
0
BCD delay
10
CFG: READ
CFG: DATA1
CFG: DATA2
CFG: DATA3
CFG: DATA4
CFG: LOAD
CFG: BUSY-IN
CFG: FAIL-IN
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
11
0
0
0.0001
0
0
1
0
{1}
2000
{1}
255
{1}
100000
{0.0001}
100000
{1} 1000000000
BCD2 code
BCD2 subcode
BCD2 numerator
BCD2 denominator
BCD2 offset
No hand-shake
BCD mode
With hand-shake
{1 ms}
255 BCD delay
51
{1}
25132
CFG: BCD2-READ
DIS: READ
DIS: DATA1
DIS: DATA2
DIS: DATA3
DIS: DATA4
DIS: LOAD
DIS: LOAD
DIS: BUSY-IN
Output signal
BCD result
Code
Subcode
Numerator
Denominator
Offset
BCD mode
-2147483647{1} 2147483647 Signal output
C1727 BCD delay
DIS: BCD2-READ
Display only
141
0
1
0.0001
0
0
10
11
{1}
2000
0
{1}
255
0
{1}
100000
0.0001 {0.0001}
100000
0
{1} 1000000000
0
No hand-shake
1
With hand-shake
0
{1 ms}
255
BCD3 code
BCD3 subcode
BCD3 numerator
BCD3 denominator
BCD3 offset
BCD mode
BCD delay
9300POSBA1098
11-63
Appendix
Code
11-64
LCD
[C1728]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CFG: READ
CFG: DATA1
CFG: DATA2
CFG: DATA3
CFG: DATA4
CFG: LOAD
CFG: BUSY-IN
CFG: FAIL-IN
C1729
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C1810
C1811
DIS: READ
DIS: DATA1
DIS: DATA2
DIS: DATA3
DIS: DATA4
DIS: LOAD
DIS: BUSY-IN
DIS: FAIL-IN
S/W Id keypad
S/W date keyp
9300POSBA1098
Possible settings
Lenze
Selection
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
51
{1}
IMPORTANT
Info
25132
CFG: BCD3-READ
DIS: BCD3-READ
Display only
SW-EKZ LECOM
SW release date
Appendix
11.3
Selection
000050
000055:
000100:
001000:
001006:
001007:
005000:
005001:
005002:
005003:
005004:
005005:
005009:
005050:
005051:
005100:
005550:
005600:
005650:
005655:
005700:
005705:
006200:
006205:
006210:
006215:
006230:
006232:
006234:
006300:
006350:
006400:
006405:
006410:
006550:
006600:
007200:
007205:
007210:
010000:
011200:
011201:
011300:
011301:
011302:
015028:
019500:
019502:
019503:
019504:
019505:
019506:
019507:
019510:
019511:
Selection lists
list #01
AIN1-OUT
AIN2-OUT
DFSET-NOUT
FIXED 0%
FIXED 100%
FIXED -100%
MCTRL-NSET2
MCTRL-NACT
MCTRL-MSET2
MCTRL-MACT
MCTRL-IACT
MCTRL-DCVOLT
MCTRL-PHI-ANA
NSET-NOUT
NSET-RFG-I
MPOT1-OUT
ADD1-OUT
RFG1-OUT
ASW1-OUT
ASW2-OUT
ANEG1-OUT
ANEG2-OUT
CONV1-OUT
CONV2-OUT
CONV3-OUT
CONV4-OUT
CONVPHA1-OUT
CONVPHA2-OUT
CONVPHA3-OUT
S&H1-OUT
CURVE1-OUT
FCNT1-OUT
FCNT2-OUT
FCNT3-OUT
TEACH1-CNT
SYNC1-OUT3
CONVDA1-OUT
CONVDA2-OUT
CONVDA3-OUT
BRK1-M-SET
RFGX1-OUT
RFGX1-VSOUT
SELA1-OUT1
SELA1-OUT2
SELA1-SELECT
Utilization
FCODE-17
FCODE-26/1
FCODE-26/2
FCODE-27/1
FCODE-27/2
FCODE-32
FCODE-37
FCODE-108/1
FCODE-108/2
019512:
019513:
019515:
019517:
019521:
019522:
019523:
019524:
019525:
019526:
019527:
019528:
019529:
019530:
019531:
019532:
019533:
019534:
019535:
019536:
019537:
019538:
019539:
019540:
019551:
019552:
019553:
019554:
019555:
019556:
019557:
019558:
019559:
019560:
020101:
020102:
020103:
020201:
020202:
020203:
020204:
020301:
020302:
020303:
020304:
025101:
025102:
025103:
030000:
030010:
030020:
030021:
030030:
031301:
031302:
FCODE-109/1
FCODE-109/2
FCODE-141
FCODE-1211
FCODE-472/1
FCODE-472/2
FCODE-472/3
FCODE-472/4
FCODE-472/5
FCODE-472/6
FCODE-472/7
FCODE-472/8
FCODE-472/9
FCODE-472/10
FCODE-472/11
FCODE-472/12
FCODE-472/13
FCODE-472/14
FCODE-472/15
FCODE-472/16
FCODE-472/17
FCODE-472/18
FCODE-472/19
FCODE-472/20
FCODE-473/1
FCODE-473/2
FCODE-473/3
FCODE-473/4
FCODE-473/5
FCODE-473/6
FCODE-473/7
FCODE-473/8
FCODE-473/9
FCODE-473/10
CAN-IN1.W1
CAN-IN1.W2
CAN-IN1.W3
CAN-IN2.W1
CAN-IN2.W2
CAN-IN2.W3
CAN-IN2.W4
CAN-IN3.W1
CAN-IN3.W2
CAN-IN3.W3
CAN-IN3.W4
AIF-IN.W1
AIF-IN.W2
AIF-IN.W3
POS-ACT-PS-NO
POS-NSET
POS-NOUT
POS-MOUT
POS-POUT-NORM
VTTIME-OUT1
VTTIME-OUT2
031303:
031304:
031351:
031352:
031353:
031354:
VTTIME-OUT3
VTTIME-OUT4
VTPCS-OUT1
VTPCS-OUT2
VTPCS-OUT3
VTPCS-OUT4
Selection
000051:
000052:
000053:
000054:
000055:
000060:
000065:
000100:
000500:
000501:
000502:
000503:
000504:
000505:
001000:
001001:
005001:
005002:
005003:
005050:
006000:
006001:
006400:
006405:
006410:
006450:
006451:
006452:
006453:
006454:
006455:
006456:
006457:
006460:
006461:
006462:
006463:
006464:
006465:
006466:
006467:
006600:
007150:
007151:
007152:
007153:
007154:
007155:
007156:
007157:
007158:
007159:
007160:
007161:
007162:
list #02
DIGIN1
DIGIN2
DIGIN3
DIGIN4
DIGIN5
STATE-BUS-O
DIGIN-CINH
DFSET-ACK
DCTRL-RDY
DCTRL-CINH
DCTRL-INIT
DCTRL-IMP
DCTRL-NACT=0
DCTRL-CW/CCW
FIXED 0
FIXED 1
MCTRL-QSP-OUT
MCTRL-IMAX
MCTRL-MMAX
NSET-RFG-I=0
DFRFG1-FAIL
DFRFG1-SYNC
FCNT1-EQUAL
FCNT2-EQUAL
FCNT3-EQUAL
SP1-STATUS-01
SP1-STATUS-02
SP1-STATUS-03
SP1-STATUS-04
SP1-STATUS-05
SP1-STATUS-06
SP1-STATUS-07
SP1-STATUS-08
SP2-STATUS-01
SP2-STATUS-02
SP2-STATUS-03
SP2-STATUS-04
SP2-STATUS-05
SP2-STATUS-06
SP2-STATUS-07
SP2-STATUS-08
SYNC1-STAT
CONVAD1-0
CONVAD1-1
CONVAD1-2
CONVAD1-3
CONVAD1-4
CONVAD1-5
CONVAD1-6
CONVAD1-7
CONVAD1-8
CONVAD1-9
CONVAD1-10
CONVAD1-11
CONVAD1-12
9300POSBA1098
11-65
Appendix
Selection list #02

(continued)
007163:
007164:
007165:
007170:
007171:
007172:
007173:
007174:
007175:
007176:
007177:
007178:
007179:
007180:
007181:
007182:
007183:
007184:
007185:
010000:
010001:
010002:
010003:
010250:
010251:
010500:
010505:
010510:
010515:
010520:
010550:
010555:
010560:
010565:
010570:
010600:
010605:
010610:
010615:
010620:
010650:
010655:
010700:
010705:
010750:
010755:
010900:
010905:
011000:
011005:
011010:
012000:
013000:
013001:
013005:
11-66
CONVAD1-13
CONVAD1-14
CONVAD1-SIGN
CONVAD2-0
CONVAD2-1
CONVAD2-2
CONVAD2-3
CONVAD2-4
CONVAD2-5
CONVAD2-6
CONVAD2-7
CONVAD2-8
CONVAD2-9
CONVAD2-10
CONVAD2-11
CONVAD2-12
CONVAD2-13
CONVAD2-14
CONVAD2-SIGN
BRK1-OUT
BRK1-CINH
BRK1-QSP
BRK1-M-STORE
R/L/Q-QSP
R/L/Q-R/L
AND1-OUT
AND2-OUT
AND3-OUT
AND4-OUT
AND5-OUT
OR1-OUT
OR2-OUT
OR3-OUT
OR4-OUT
OR5-OUT
NOT1-OUT
NOT2-OUT
NOT3-OUT
NOT4-OUT
NOT5-OUT
CMP1-OUT
CMP2-OUT
DIGDEL1-OUT
DIGDEL2-OUT
TRANS1-OUT
TRANS2-OUT
FLIP1-OUT
FLIP2-OUT
CMPPH1-OUT
CMPPH2-OUT
CMPPH3-OUT
PHINT1-FAIL
FEVAN1-BUSY
FEVAN1-FAIL
FEVAN2-BUSY
9300POSBA1098
013006:
013010:
013011:
013015:
013016:
013020:
013021:
013025:
013026:
013050:
013051:
013052:
013053:
013054:
013055:
013056:
013057:
013058:
013059:
013060:
013061:
013062:
013063:
013065:
013066:
013067:
013068:
013069:
013070:
013071:
013072:
013073:
013074:
013075:
013076:
013077:
013078:
013080:
013081:
013082:
013083:
013084:
013085:
013086:
013087:
013088:
013089:
013090:
013091:
013092:
013093:
015000:
015001:
015002:
015003:
015004:
015010:
015011:
FEVAN2-FAIL
FEVAN3-BUSY
FEVAN3-FAIL
FEVAN4-BUSY
FEVAN4-FAIL
FEVAN5-BUSY
FEVAN5-FAIL
FEVAN6-BUSY
FEVAN6-FAIL
BCD1-SEL1
BCD1-SEL2
BCD1-SEL3
BCD1-SEL4
BCD1-SEL5
BCD1-SEL6
BCD1-SEL7
BCD1-SEL8
BCD1-SIGN
BCD1-NEW-DATA
BCD1-EOT
BCD1-DATA-FLT
BCD1-BUSY
BCD1-FAIL
BCD2-SEL1
BCD2-SEL2
BCD2-SEL3
BCD2-SEL4
BCD2-SEL5
BCD2-SEL6
BCD2-SEL7
BCD2-SEL8
BCD2-SIGN
BCD2-NEW-DATA
BCD2-EOT
BCD2-DATA-FLT
BCD2-BUSY
BCD2-FAIL
BCD3-SEL1
BCD3-SEL2
BCD3-SEL3
BCD3-SEL4
BCD3-SEL5
BCD3-SEL6
BCD3-SEL7
BCD3-SEL8
BCD3-SIGN
BCD3-NEW-DATA
BCD3-EOT
BCD3-DATA-FLT
BCD3-BUSY
BCD3-FAIL
DCTRL-TRIP
DCTRL-MESS
DCTRL-WARN
DCTRL-FAIL
DCTRL-FAILQSP
MONIT-LU
MONIT-OU
015012:
015013:
015014:
015015:
015016:
015017:
015018:
015019:
015020:
015021:
015022:
015023:
015024:
015026:
015027:
015028:
015029:
015030:
015031:
015032:
015033:
015034:
015040:
015041:
015042:
015043:
015301:
015302:
015304:
015305:
015306:
015307:
015308:
015309:
015312:
015314:
015315:
015316:
015317:
015318:
019500:
019521:
019522:
019523:
019524:
019525:
019526:
019527:
019528:
019529:
019530:
019531:
019532:
019533:
019534:
019535:
019536:
019537:
MONIT-EEr
MONIT-OC1
MONIT-OC2
MONIT-LP1
MONIT-OH
MONIT-OH3
MONIT-OH4
MONIT-OH7
MONIT-OH8
MONIT-Sd2
MONIT-Sd3
MONIT-P03
MONIT-P13
MONIT-CE0
MONIT-NMAX
MONIT-OC5
MONIT-SD5
MONIT-SD6
MONIT-SD7
MONIT-H07
MONIT-H10
MONIT-H11
MONIT-CE1
MONIT-CE2
MONIT-CE3
MONIT-CE4
MONIT-P01
MONIT-P02
MONIT-P04
MONIT-P05
MONIT-P06
MONIT-P07
MONIT-P08
MONIT-P09
MONIT-P12
MONIT-P14
MONIT-P15
MONIT-P16
MONIT-P17
MONIT-P18
FCODE-250
FCODE-471.B0
FCODE-471.B1
FCODE-471.B2
FCODE-471.B3
FCODE-471.B4
FCODE-471.B5
FCODE-471.B6
FCODE-471.B7
FCODE-471.B8
FCODE-471.B9
FCODE-471.B10
FCODE-471.B11
FCODE-471.B12
FCODE-471.B13
FCODE-471.B14
FCODE-471.B15
FCODE-471.B16
019538:
019539:
019540:
019541:
019542:
019543:
019544:
019545:
019546:
019547:
019548:
019549:
019550:
019551:
019552:
019751:
019752:
019753:
019755:
019756:
019757:
019758:
019763:
019764:
019765:
019766:
020001:
020002:
020003:
020005:
020006:
020007:
020008:
020013:
020014:
020015:
020016:
020101:
020102:
020103:
020104:
020105:
020106:
020107:
020108:
020109:
020110:
020111:
020112:
020113:
020114:
020115:
020116:
020117:
FCODE-471.B17
FCODE-471.B18
FCODE-471.B19
FCODE-471.B20
FCODE-471.B21
FCODE-471.B22
FCODE-471.B23
FCODE-471.B24
FCODE-471.B25
FCODE-471.B26
FCODE-471.B27
FCODE-471.B28
FCODE-471.B29
FCODE-471.B30
FCODE-471.B31
FCODE-135.B0
FCODE-135.B1
FCODE-135.B2
FCODE-135.B4
FCODE-135.B5
FCODE-135.B6
FCODE-135.B7
FCODE-135.B12
FCODE-135.B13
FCODE-135.B14
FCODE-135.B15
CAN-CTRL.B0
CAN-CTRL.B1
CAN-CTRL.B2
CAN-CTRL.B4
CAN-CTRL.B5
CAN-CTRL.B6
CAN-CTRL.B7
CAN-CTRL.B12
CAN-CTRL.B13
CAN-CTRL.B14
CAN-CTRL.B15
CAN-IN1.B0
CAN-IN1.B1
CAN-IN1.B2
CAN-IN1.B3
CAN-IN1.B4
CAN-IN1.B5
CAN-IN1.B6
CAN-IN1.B7
CAN-IN1.B8
CAN-IN1.B9
CAN-IN1.B10
CAN-IN1.B11
CAN-IN1.B12
CAN-IN1.B13
CAN-IN1.B14
CAN-IN1.B15
CAN-IN1.B16
Appendix
Selection list #02

(continued)
020118:
020119:
020120:
020121:
020122:
020123:
020124:
020125:
020126:
020127:
020128:
020129:
020130:
020131:
020132:
020201:
020202:
020203:
020204:
020205:
020206:
020207:
020208:
020209:
020210:
020211:
020212:
020213:
020214:
020215:
020216:
020217:
020218:
020219:
020220:
020221:
020222:
020223:
020224:
020225:
020226:
CAN-IN1.B17
CAN-IN1.B18
CAN-IN1.B19
CAN-IN1.B20
CAN-IN1.B21
CAN-IN1.B22
CAN-IN1.B23
CAN-IN1.B24
CAN-IN1.B25
CAN-IN1.B26
CAN-IN1.B27
CAN-IN1.B28
CAN-IN1.B29
CAN-IN1.B30
CAN-IN1.B31
CAN-IN2.B0
CAN-IN2.B1
CAN-IN2.B2
CAN-IN2.B3
CAN-IN2.B4
CAN-IN2.B5
CAN-IN2.B6
CAN-IN2.B7
CAN-IN2.B8
CAN-IN2.B9
CAN-IN2.B10
CAN-IN2.B11
CAN-IN2.B12
CAN-IN2.B13
CAN-IN2.B14
CAN-IN2.B15
CAN-IN2.B16
CAN-IN2.B17
CAN-IN2.B18
CAN-IN2.B19
CAN-IN2.B20
CAN-IN2.B21
CAN-IN2.B22
CAN-IN2.B23
CAN-IN2.B24
CAN-IN2.B25
020227:
020228:
020229:
020230:
020231:
020232:
020301:
020302:
020303:
020304:
020305:
020306:
020307:
020308:
020309:
020310:
020311:
020312:
020313:
020314:
020315:
020316:
020317:
020318:
020319:
020320:
020321:
020322:
020323:
020324:
020325:
020326:
020327:
020328:
020329:
020330:
020331:
020332:
025001:
025002:
025003:
025005:
025006:
025007:
CAN-IN2.B26
CAN-IN2.B27
CAN-IN2.B28
CAN-IN2.B29
CAN-IN2.B30
CAN-IN2.B31
CAN-IN3.B0
CAN-IN3.B1
CAN-IN3.B2
CAN-IN3.B3
CAN-IN3.B4
CAN-IN3.B5
CAN-IN3.B6
CAN-IN3.B7
CAN-IN3.B8
CAN-IN3.B9
CAN-IN3.B10
CAN-IN3.B11
CAN-IN3.B12
CAN-IN3.B13
CAN-IN3.B14
CAN-IN3.B15
CAN-IN3.B16
CAN-IN3.B17
CAN-IN3.B18
CAN-IN3.B19
CAN-IN3.B20
CAN-IN3.B21
CAN-IN3.B22
CAN-IN3.B23
CAN-IN3.B24
CAN-IN3.B25
CAN-IN3.B26
CAN-IN3.B27
CAN-IN3.B28
CAN-IN3.B29
CAN-IN3.B30
CAN-IN3.B31
AIF-CTRL.B0
AIF-CTRL.B1
AIF-CTRL.B2
AIF-CTRL.B4
AIF-CTRL.B5
AIF-CTRL.B6
025008:
025013:
025014:
025015:
025016:
025101:
025102:
025103:
025104:
025105:
025106:
025107:
025108:
025109:
025110:
025111:
025112:
025113:
025114:
025115:
025116:
025117:
025118:
025119:
025120:
025121:
025122:
025123:
025124:
025125:
025126:
025127:
025128:
025129:
025130:
025131:
025132:
030000:
030001:
030002:
030003:
030010:
030011:
030012:
AIF-CTRL.B7
AIF-CTRL.B12
AIF-CTRL.B13
AIF-CTRL.B14
AIF-CTRL.B15
AIF-IN.B0
AIF-IN.B1
AIF-IN.B2
AIF-IN.B3
AIF-IN.B4
AIF-IN.B5
AIF-IN.B6
AIF-IN.B7
AIF-IN.B8
AIF-IN.B9
AIF-IN.B10
AIF-IN.B11
AIF-IN.B12
AIF-IN.B13
AIF-IN.B14
AIF-IN.B15
AIF-IN.B16
AIF-IN.B17
AIF-IN.B18
AIF-IN.B19
AIF-IN.B20
AIF-IN.B21
AIF-IN.B22
AIF-IN.B23
AIF-IN.B24
AIF-IN.B25
AIF-IN.B26
AIF-IN.B27
AIF-IN.B28
AIF-IN.B29
AIF-IN.B30
AIF-IN.B31
POS-STARTED
POS-STOPED
POS-ENDED
POS-RESETED
POS-STDBY-ACT
POS-MANU-ACT
POS-REF-OK
030013:
030014:
030015:
030016:
030017:
030101:
030102:
030103:
030104:
030105:
030106:
030107:
030108:
030109:
030110:
030111:
030112:
030113:
030114:
030115:
030116:
030117:
030118:
030119:
030120:
030121:
030122:
030123:
030124:
030125:
030126:
030127:
030128:
030129:
030130:
030131:
030132:
030200:
030201:
030202:
030203:
030204:
030205:
030206:
030207:
POS-IN-TARGET
POS-VTRAV-REA
POS-VFIN-REAC
POS-ACC-RAMP
POS-DCC-RAMP
POS-PFO1
POS-PFO2
POS-PFO3
POS-PFO4
POS-PFO5
POS-PFO6
POS-PFO7
POS-PFO8
POS-PFO9
POS-PFO10
POS-PFO11
POS-PFO12
POS-PFO13
POS-PFO14
POS-PFO15
POS-PFO16
POS-PFO17
POS-PFO18
POS-PFO19
POS-PFO20
POS-PFO21
POS-PFO22
POS-PFO23
POS-PFO24
POS-PFO25
POS-PFO26
POS-PFO27
POS-PFO28
POS-PFO29
POS-PFO30
POS-PFO31
POS-PFO32
POS-TP1-EN
POS-TP1-RECOG
POS-TP2-EN
POS-TP2-RECOG
POS-TP3-EN
POS-TP3-RECOG
POS-TP4-EN
POS-TP4-RECOG
9300POSBA1098
11-67
Appendix
Selection
000100:
000101:
001000:
005000:
005520:
005525:
005530:
005535:
005540:
005545:
005775:
005780:
006237:
006600:
007050:
007055:
007060:
012000:
012050:
019521:
019522:
019523:
019524:
019525:
019526:
019527:
019528:
019529:
019530:
020103:
020201:
020202:
020301:
020302:
025103:
025104:
030010:
030011:
030012:
030013:
030014:
030015:
030016:
030017:
030020:
030021:
11-68
list #03
DFSET-PSET
DFSET-PSET2
FIXED0INC
MCTRL-PHI-ANG
ARITPH1-OUT
ARITPH2-OUT
ARITPH3-OUT
ARITPH4-OUT
ARITPH5-OUT
ARITPH6-OUT
SELPH1-OUT
SELPH2-OUT
CONVPHPH2-OUT
SYNC1-OUT2
CONVAPH1-OUT
CONVAPH2-OUT
CONVAPH3-OUT
PHINT1-OUT
PHDIV1-OUT
FCODE-474/1
FCODE-474/2
FCODE-474/3
FCODE-474/4
FCODE-474/5
FCODE-474/6
FCODE-474/7
FCODE-474/8
FCODE-474/9
FCODE-474/10
CAN-IN1.D1
CAN-IN2.D1
CAN-IN2.D2
CAN-IN3.D1
CAN-IN3.D2
AIF-IN.D1
AIF-IN.D2
POS-TARGET
POS-VTRAV
POS-VFINAL
POS-ACC
POS-DCC
POS-ASET
POS-VSET
POS-SETPOS
POS-POUT
POS-ACTPOS
9300POSBA1098
031001:
031002:
031003:
031004:
031005:
031006:
031007:
031008:
031009:
031010:
031011:
031012:
031013:
031014:
031015:
031016:
031017:
031018:
031019:
031020:
031021:
031022:
031023:
031024:
031025:
031026:
031027:
031028:
031029:
031030:
031031:
031032:
031033:
031034:
031035:
031036:
031037:
031038:
031039:
031040:
031041:
031042:
031043:
031044:
031045:
031046:
031047:
031048:
031049:
031050:
031051:
031052:
VTPOS-OUT1
VTPOS-OUT2
VTPOS-OUT3
VTPOS-OUT4
VTPOS-OUT5
VTPOS-OUT6
VTPOS-OUT7
VTPOS-OUT8
VTPOS-OUT9
VTPOS-OUT10
VTPOS-OUT11
VTPOS-OUT12
VTPOS-OUT13
VTPOS-OUT14
VTPOS-OUT15
VTPOS-OUT16
VTPOS-OUT17
VTPOS-OUT18
VTPOS-OUT19
VTPOS-OUT20
VTPOS-OUT21
VTPOS-OUT22
VTPOS-OUT23
VTPOS-OUT24
VTPOS-OUT25
VTPOS-OUT26
VTPOS-OUT27
VTPOS-OUT28
VTPOS-OUT29
VTPOS-OUT30
VTPOS-OUT31
VTPOS-OUT32
VTPOS-OUT33
VTPOS-OUT34
VTPOS-OUT35
VTPOS-OUT36
VTPOS-OUT37
VTPOS-OUT38
VTPOS-OUT39
VTPOS-OUT40
VTPOS-OUT41
VTPOS-OUT42
VTPOS-OUT43
VTPOS-OUT44
VTPOS-OUT45
VTPOS-OUT46
VTPOS-OUT47
VTPOS-OUT48
VTPOS-OUT49
VTPOS-OUT50
VTPOS-OUT51
VTPOS-OUT52
031053:
031054:
031055:
031056:
031057:
031058:
031059:
031060:
031061:
031062:
031063:
031064:
031065:
031066:
031067:
031068:
031069:
031070:
031071:
031072:
031073:
031074:
031075:
031076:
031077:
031078:
031079:
031080:
031081:
031082:
031083:
031084:
031085:
031086:
031087:
031088:
031089:
031090:
031091:
031092:
031093:
031094:
031095:
031096:
031097:
031098:
031099:
031100:
031101:
031102:
031103:
031104:
VTPOS-OUT53
VTPOS-OUT54
VTPOS-OUT55
VTPOS-OUT56
VTPOS-OUT57
VTPOS-OUT58
VTPOS-OUT59
VTPOS-OUT60
VTPOS-OUT61
VTPOS-OUT62
VTPOS-OUT63
VTPOS-OUT64
VTPOS-OUT65
VTPOS-OUT66
VTPOS-OUT67
VTPOS-OUT68
VTPOS-OUT69
VTPOS-OUT70
VTPOS-OUT71
VTPOS-OUT72
VTPOS-OUT73
VTPOS-OUT74
VTPOS-OUT75
VTPOS-OUT76
VTPOS-OUT77
VTPOS-OUT78
VTPOS-OUT79
VTPOS-OUT80
VTPOS-OUT81
VTPOS-OUT82
VTPOS-OUT83
VTPOS-OUT84
VTPOS-OUT85
VTPOS-OUT86
VTPOS-OUT87
VTPOS-OUT88
VTPOS-OUT89
VTPOS-OUT90
VTPOS-OUT91
VTPOS-OUT92
VTPOS-OUT93
VTPOS-OUT94
VTPOS-OUT95
VTPOS-OUT96
VTPOS-OUT97
VTPOS-OUT98
VTPOS-OUT99
VTPOS-OUT100
VTPOS-OUT101
VTPOS-OUT102
VTPOS-OUT103
VTPOS-OUT104
031201:
031202:
031203:
031204:
031251:
031252:
031253:
031254:
VTVEL-OUT1
VTVEL-OUT2
VTVEL-OUT3
VTVEL-OUT4
VTACC-OUT1
VTACC-OUT2
VTACC-OUT3
VTACC-OUT4
Appendix
Selection
000050:
000100:
000250:
001000:
005000:
006000:
006220:
006600:
019521:
019522:
030000:
list #04
DFIN-OUT
DFSET-POUT
DFOUT-OUT
FIXEDPHI-0
MCTRL-PHI-ACT
DFRFG1-OUT
CONV5-OUT
SYNC1-OUT1
FCODE-475/1
FCODE-475/2
POS-PHI-SET
Selection
000000:
000050:
000055:
000070:
000075:
000100:
000200:
000250:
005050:
005100:
005520:
005525:
005530:
005535:
005540:
005545:
005550:
005600:
005650:
005655:
005700:
005705:
005775:
005780:
006000:
006200:
006205:
006210:
006215:
006220:
006230:
006232:
006234:
006237:
006300:
006350:
006400:
006405:
006410:
006450:
006460:
006550:
006600:
007050:
007055:
007060:
007150:
007170:
007200:
007205:
007210:
list #05
empty
AIN1
AIN2
AOUT1
AOUT2
DFSET
DFIN
DFOUT
NSET
MPOT1
ARITPH1
ARITPH2
ARITPH3
ARITPH4
ARITPH5
ARITPH6
ADD1
RFG1
ASW1
ASW2
ANEG1
ANEG2
SELPH1
SELPH2
DFRFG1
CONV1
CONV2
CONV3
CONV4
CONV5
CONVPHA1
CONVPHA2
CONVPHA3
CONVPHPH2
S&H1
CURVE1
FCNT1
FCNT2
FCNT3
SP1
SP2
TEACH1
SYNC1
CONVAPH1
CONVAPH2
CONVAPH3
CONVAD1
CONVAD2
CONVDA1
CONVDA2
CONVDA3
008000:
008050:
010000:
010250:
010500:
010505:
010510:
010515:
010520:
010550:
010555:
010560:
010565:
010570:
010600:
010605:
010610:
010615:
010620:
010650:
010655:
010700:
010705:
010750:
010755:
010900:
010905:
011000:
011005:
011010:
012000:
012050:
013000:
013005:
013010:
013015:
013020:
013025:
013050:
013065:
013080:
015100:
DISA
DISPH
BRK1
R/L/Q
AND1
AND2
AND3
AND4
AND5
OR1
OR2
OR3
OR4
OR5
NOT1
NOT2
NOT3
NOT4
NOT5
CMP1
CMP2
DIGDEL1
DIGDEL2
TRANS1
TRANS2
FLIP1
FLIP2
CMPPH1
CMPPH2
CMPPH3
PHINT1
PHDIV1
FEVAN1
FEVAN2
FEVAN3
FEVAN4
FEVAN5
FEVAN6
BCD1
BCD2
BCD3
MLP1
020000:
025000:
030000:
030050:
031000:
031200:
031250:
031300:
031350:
CAN-OUT
AIF-OUT
POS
POS-SRAMPS
VTPOS
VTVEL
VTACC
VTTIME
VTPCS
9300POSBA1098
11-69
Appendix
Selection
000000:
000011:
000012:
000015:
000022:
000032:
000050:
000053:
000057:
000058:
000061:
000062:
000063:
000064:
000065:
000070:
000071:
000072:
000073:
000074:
000075:
000077:
000078:
000079:
000082:
000083:
000085:
000086:
000087:
000091:
000105:
000107:
000110:
000111:
000151:
000152:
000153:
000154:
000155:
000156:
000157:
000158:
000159:
000162:
000163:
000164:
000165:
000166:
000167:
000168:
000200:
001030:
001091:
002032:
002054:
002057:
002058:
11-70
list #10
No fail
OC1 trip
OC2 trip
OC5 trip
LUQ trip
LP1 trip
OH trip
OH3 trip
OH7 trip
OH8 trip
CE0 trip
CE1 trip
CE2 trip
CE3 trip
CE4 trip
U15 trip
CCr trip
Pr1 trip
Pr2 trip
PEr trip
Pr0 trip
Pr3 trip
Pr4 trip
PI trip
Sd2 trip
Sd3 trip
Sd5 trip
Sd6 trip
Sd7 trip
EEr trip
H05 trip
H07 trip
H10 trip
H11 trip
P01 trip
P02 trip
P03 trip
P04 trip
P05 trip
P06 trip
P07 trip
P08 trip
P09 trip
P12 trip
P13 trip
P14 trip
P15 trip
P16 trip
P17 trip
P18 trip
NMAX trip
LU message
EEr message
LP1 warning
OH4 warning
OH7 warning
OH8 warning
9300POSBA1098
002061:
002062:
002063:
002064:
002065:
002082:
002083:
002085:
002086:
002091:
002153:
002163:
002164:
002165:
002166:
002167:
002168:
003091:
003151:
003152:
003154:
003155:
003156:
003157:
003158:
003159:
003162:
003163:
003164:
003165:
003166:
003167:
003168:
CE0 warning
CE1 warning
CE2 warning
CE3 warning
CE4 warning
Sd2 warning
Sd3 warning
Sd5 warning
Sd6 warning
EER warning
P03 warning
P13 warning
P14 warning
P15 warning
P16 warning
P17 warning
P18 warning
EEr QSP
P01 QSP
P02 QSP
P04 QSP
P05 QSP
P06 QSP
P07 QSP
P08 QSP
P09 QSP
P12 QSP
P13 QSP
P14 QSP
P15 QSP
P16 QSP
P17 QSP
P18 QSP
Selection
000000:
000001:
000002:
000003:
000004:
000005:
000006:
000007:
000008:
000009:
000010:
000011:
000012:
000013:
000014:
000015:
000016:
000017:
000018:
000019:
000020:
000021:
000022:
000023:
000024:
000025:
000026:
000027:
000028:
000029:
000030:
000031:
000032:
000033:
000034:
000035:
000036:
000037:
000038:
000039:
000040:
000041:
000042:
000043:
000044:
000045:
000046:
000047:
000048:
000049:
000050:
000051:
000052:
000053:
000054:
000055:
000056:
list #11
Real Zero
VTPOS-No 001
VTPOS-No 002
VTPOS-No 003
VTPOS-No 004
VTPOS-No 005
VTPOS-No 006
VTPOS-No 007
VTPOS-No 008
VTPOS-No 009
VTPOS-No 010
VTPOS-No 011
VTPOS-No 012
VTPOS-No 013
VTPOS-No 014
VTPOS-No 015
VTPOS-No 016
VTPOS-No 017
VTPOS-No 018
VTPOS-No 019
VTPOS-No 020
VTPOS-No 021
VTPOS-No 022
VTPOS-No 023
VTPOS-No 024
VTPOS-No 025
VTPOS-No 026
VTPOS-No 027
VTPOS-No 028
VTPOS-No 029
VTPOS-No 030
VTPOS-No 031
VTPOS-No 032
VTPOS-No 033
VTPOS-No 034
VTPOS-No 035
VTPOS-No 036
VTPOS-No 037
VTPOS-No 038
VTPOS-No 039
VTPOS-No 040
VTPOS-No 041
VTPOS-No 042
VTPOS-No 043
VTPOS-No 044
VTPOS-No 045
VTPOS-No 046
VTPOS-No 047
VTPOS-No 048
VTPOS-No 049
VTPOS-No 050
VTPOS-No 051
VTPOS-No 052
VTPOS-No 053
VTPOS-No 054
VTPOS-No 055
VTPOS-No 056
000057:
000058:
000059:
000060:
000061:
000062:
000063:
000064:
000065:
000066:
000067:
000068:
000069:
000070:
000071:
000072:
000073:
000074:
000075:
000076:
000077:
000078:
000079:
000080:
000081:
000082:
000083:
000084:
000085:
000086:
000087:
000088:
000089:
000090:
000091:
000092:
000093:
000094:
000095:
000096:
000097:
000098:
000099:
000100:
000101:
000102:
000103:
000104:
VTPOS-No 057
VTPOS-No 058
VTPOS-No 059
VTPOS-No 060
VTPOS-No 061
VTPOS-No 062
VTPOS-No 063
VTPOS-No 064
VTPOS-No 065
VTPOS-No 066
VTPOS-No 067
VTPOS-No 068
VTPOS-No 069
VTPOS-No 070
VTPOS-No 071
VTPOS-No 072
VTPOS-No 073
VTPOS-No 074
VTPOS-No 075
VTPOS-No 076
VTPOS-No 077
VTPOS-No 078
VTPOS-No 079
VTPOS-No 080
VTPOS-No 081
VTPOS-No 082
VTPOS-No 083
VTPOS-No 084
VTPOS-No 085
VTPOS-No 086
VTPOS-No 087
VTPOS-No 088
VTPOS-No 089
VTPOS-No 090
VTPOS-No 091
VTPOS-No 092
VTPOS-No 093
VTPOS-No 094
VTPOS-No 095
VTPOS-No 096
VTPOS-No 097
VTPOS-No 098
VTPOS-No 099
VTPOS-No 100
VTPOS-No 101
VTPOS-No 102
VTPOS-No 103
VTPOS-No 104
Appendix
Selection
000000:
000001:
000002:
000003:
000004:
000005:
000006:
000007:
000008:
000009:
000010:
000011:
000012:
000013:
000014:
000015:
000016:
000017:
000018:
000019:
000020:
000021:
000022:
000023:
000024:
000025:
000026:
000027:
000028:
000029:
000030:
000031:
000032:
000033:
000034:
000035:
000036:
000037:
000038:
000039:
000040:
000041:
000042:
000043:
000044:
000045:
000046:
000047:
000048:
000049:
000050:
000051:
000052:
000053:
000054:
000055:
000056:
list #12
Trav. Range
VTPOS-No 001
VTPOS-No 002
VTPOS-No 003
VTPOS-No 004
VTPOS-No 005
VTPOS-No 006
VTPOS-No 007
VTPOS-No 008
VTPOS-No 009
VTPOS-No 010
VTPOS-No 011
VTPOS-No 012
VTPOS-No 013
VTPOS-No 014
VTPOS-No 015
VTPOS-No 016
VTPOS-No 017
VTPOS-No 018
VTPOS-No 019
VTPOS-No 020
VTPOS-No 021
VTPOS-No 022
VTPOS-No 023
VTPOS-No 024
VTPOS-No 025
VTPOS-No 026
VTPOS-No 027
VTPOS-No 028
VTPOS-No 029
VTPOS-No 030
VTPOS-No 031
VTPOS-No 032
VTPOS-No 033
VTPOS-No 034
VTPOS-No 035
VTPOS-No 036
VTPOS-No 037
VTPOS-No 038
VTPOS-No 039
VTPOS-No 040
VTPOS-No 041
VTPOS-No 042
VTPOS-No 043
VTPOS-No 044
VTPOS-No 045
VTPOS-No 046
VTPOS-No 047
VTPOS-No 048
VTPOS-No 049
VTPOS-No 050
VTPOS-No 051
VTPOS-No 052
VTPOS-No 053
VTPOS-No 054
VTPOS-No 055
VTPOS-No 056
000057:
000058:
000059:
000060:
000061:
000062:
000063:
000064:
000065:
000066:
000067:
000068:
000069:
000070:
000071:
000072:
000073:
000074:
000075:
000076:
000077:
000078:
000079:
000080:
000081:
000082:
000083:
000084:
000085:
000086:
000087:
000088:
000089:
000090:
000091:
000092:
000093:
000094:
000095:
000096:
000097:
000098:
000099:
000100:
000101:
000102:
000103:
000104:
VTPOS-No 057
VTPOS-No 058
VTPOS-No 059
VTPOS-No 060
VTPOS-No 061
VTPOS-No 062
VTPOS-No 063
VTPOS-No 064
VTPOS-No 065
VTPOS-No 066
VTPOS-No 067
VTPOS-No 068
VTPOS-No 069
VTPOS-No 070
VTPOS-No 071
VTPOS-No 072
VTPOS-No 073
VTPOS-No 074
VTPOS-No 075
VTPOS-No 076
VTPOS-No 077
VTPOS-No 078
VTPOS-No 079
VTPOS-No 080
VTPOS-No 081
VTPOS-No 082
VTPOS-No 083
VTPOS-No 084
VTPOS-No 085
VTPOS-No 086
VTPOS-No 087
VTPOS-No 088
VTPOS-No 089
VTPOS-No 090
VTPOS-No 091
VTPOS-No 092
VTPOS-No 093
VTPOS-No 094
VTPOS-No 095
VTPOS-No 096
VTPOS-No 097
VTPOS-No 098
VTPOS-No 099
VTPOS-No 100
VTPOS-No 101
VTPOS-No 102
VTPOS-No 103
VTPOS-No 104
Selection
000000:
000001:
000002:
000003:
000004:
000005:
000006:
000007:
000008:
000009:
000010:
000011:
000012:
000013:
000014:
000015:
000016:
000017:
000018:
000019:
000020:
000021:
000022:
000023:
000024:
000025:
000026:
000027:
000028:
000029:
000030:
000031:
000032:
000033:
000034:
000035:
000036:
000037:
000038:
000039:
000040:
000041:
000042:
000043:
000044:
000045:
000046:
000047:
000048:
000049:
000050:
000051:
000052:
000053:
000054:
000055:
000056:
list #13
Target = TP
VTPOS-No 001
VTPOS-No 002
VTPOS-No 003
VTPOS-No 004
VTPOS-No 005
VTPOS-No 006
VTPOS-No 007
VTPOS-No 008
VTPOS-No 009
VTPOS-No 010
VTPOS-No 011
VTPOS-No 012
VTPOS-No 013
VTPOS-No 014
VTPOS-No 015
VTPOS-No 016
VTPOS-No 017
VTPOS-No 018
VTPOS-No 019
VTPOS-No 020
VTPOS-No 021
VTPOS-No 022
VTPOS-No 023
VTPOS-No 024
VTPOS-No 025
VTPOS-No 026
VTPOS-No 027
VTPOS-No 028
VTPOS-No 029
VTPOS-No 030
VTPOS-No 031
VTPOS-No 032
VTPOS-No 033
VTPOS-No 034
VTPOS-No 035
VTPOS-No 036
VTPOS-No 037
VTPOS-No 038
VTPOS-No 039
VTPOS-No 040
VTPOS-No 041
VTPOS-No 042
VTPOS-No 043
VTPOS-No 044
VTPOS-No 045
VTPOS-No 046
VTPOS-No 047
VTPOS-No 048
VTPOS-No 049
VTPOS-No 050
VTPOS-No 051
VTPOS-No 052
VTPOS-No 053
VTPOS-No 054
VTPOS-No 055
VTPOS-No 056
000057:
000058:
000059:
000060:
000061:
000062:
000063:
000064:
000065:
000066:
000067:
000068:
000069:
000070:
000071:
000072:
000073:
000074:
000075:
000076:
000077:
000078:
000079:
000080:
000081:
000082:
000083:
000084:
000085:
000086:
000087:
000088:
000089:
000090:
000091:
000092:
000093:
000094:
000095:
000096:
000097:
000098:
000099:
000100:
000101:
000102:
000103:
000104:
VTPOS-No 057
VTPOS-No 058
VTPOS-No 059
VTPOS-No 060
VTPOS-No 061
VTPOS-No 062
VTPOS-No 063
VTPOS-No 064
VTPOS-No 065
VTPOS-No 066
VTPOS-No 067
VTPOS-No 068
VTPOS-No 069
VTPOS-No 070
VTPOS-No 071
VTPOS-No 072
VTPOS-No 073
VTPOS-No 074
VTPOS-No 075
VTPOS-No 076
VTPOS-No 077
VTPOS-No 078
VTPOS-No 079
VTPOS-No 080
VTPOS-No 081
VTPOS-No 082
VTPOS-No 083
VTPOS-No 084
VTPOS-No 085
VTPOS-No 086
VTPOS-No 087
VTPOS-No 088
VTPOS-No 089
VTPOS-No 090
VTPOS-No 091
VTPOS-No 092
VTPOS-No 093
VTPOS-No 094
VTPOS-No 095
VTPOS-No 096
VTPOS-No 097
VTPOS-No 098
VTPOS-No 099
VTPOS-No 100
VTPOS-No 101
VTPOS-No 102
VTPOS-No 103
VTPOS-No 104
9300POSBA1098
11-71
Appendix
Selection
000000:
000001:
000002:
000003:
000004:
000005:
000006:
000007:
000008:
000009:
000010:
000011:
000012:
000013:
000014:
000015:
000016:
000017:
000018:
000019:
000020:
000021:
000022:
000023:
000024:
000025:
000026:
000027:
000028:
000029:
000030:
000031:
000032:
000033:
000034:
11-72
list #14
v-max
VTVEL-No 01
VTVEL-No 02
VTVEL-No 03
VTVEL-No 04
VTVEL-No 05
VTVEL-No 06
VTVEL-No 07
VTVEL-No 08
VTVEL-No 09
VTVEL-No 10
VTVEL-No 11
VTVEL-No 12
VTVEL-No 13
VTVEL-No 14
VTVEL-No 15
VTVEL-No 16
VTVEL-No 17
VTVEL-No 18
VTVEL-No 19
VTVEL-No 20
VTVEL-No 21
VTVEL-No 22
VTVEL-No 23
VTVEL-No 24
VTVEL-No 25
VTVEL-No 26
VTVEL-No 27
VTVEL-No 28
VTVEL-No 29
VTVEL-No 30
VTVEL-No 31
VTVEL-No 32
VTVEL-No 33
VTVEL-No 34
9300POSBA1098
Selection
000000:
000001:
000002:
000003:
000004:
000005:
000006:
000007:
000008:
000009:
000010:
000011:
000012:
000013:
000014:
000015:
000016:
000017:
000018:
000019:
000020:
000021:
000022:
000023:
000024:
000025:
000026:
000027:
000028:
000029:
000030:
000031:
000032:
000033:
000034:
list #15
Standstill
VTVEL-No 01
VTVEL-No 02
VTVEL-No 03
VTVEL-No 04
VTVEL-No 05
VTVEL-No 06
VTVEL-No 07
VTVEL-No 08
VTVEL-No 09
VTVEL-No 10
VTVEL-No 11
VTVEL-No 12
VTVEL-No 13
VTVEL-No 14
VTVEL-No 15
VTVEL-No 16
VTVEL-No 17
VTVEL-No 18
VTVEL-No 19
VTVEL-No 20
VTVEL-No 21
VTVEL-No 22
VTVEL-No 23
VTVEL-No 24
VTVEL-No 25
VTVEL-No 26
VTVEL-No 27
VTVEL-No 28
VTVEL-No 29
VTVEL-No 30
VTVEL-No 31
VTVEL-No 32
VTVEL-No 33
VTVEL-No 34
Selection
000000:
000001:
000002:
000003:
000004:
000005:
000006:
000007:
000008:
000009:
000010:
000011:
000012:
000013:
000014:
000015:
000016:
000017:
000018:
000019:
000020:
000021:
000022:
000023:
000024:
000025:
000026:
000027:
000028:
000029:
000030:
000031:
000032:
000033:
000034:
list #16
a-max
VTACC-No 01
VTACC-No 02
VTACC-No 03
VTACC-No 04
VTACC-No 05
VTACC-No 06
VTACC-No 07
VTACC-No 08
VTACC-No 09
VTACC-No 10
VTACC-No 11
VTACC-No 12
VTACC-No 13
VTACC-No 14
VTACC-No 15
VTACC-No 16
VTACC-No 17
VTACC-No 18
VTACC-No 19
VTACC-No 20
VTACC-No 21
VTACC-No 22
VTACC-No 23
VTACC-No 24
VTACC-No 25
VTACC-No 26
VTACC-No 27
VTACC-No 28
VTACC-No 29
VTACC-No 30
VTACC-No 31
VTACC-No 32
VTACC-No 33
VTACC-No 34
Selection
000000:
000001:
000002:
000003:
000004:
000005:
000006:
000007:
000008:
000009:
000010:
000011:
000012:
000013:
000014:
000015:
000016:
000017:
000018:
000019:
000020:
000021:
000022:
000023:
000024:
000025:
000026:
000027:
000028:
000029:
000030:
000031:
000032:
000033:
000034:
list #17
inactive
VTPCS-No 01
VTPCS-No 02
VTPCS-No 03
VTPCS-No 04
VTPCS-No 05
VTPCS-No 06
VTPCS-No 07
VTPCS-No 08
VTPCS-No 09
VTPCS-No 10
VTPCS-No 11
VTPCS-No 12
VTPCS-No 13
VTPCS-No 14
VTPCS-No 15
VTPCS-No 16
VTPCS-No 17
VTPCS-No 18
VTPCS-No 19
VTPCS-No 20
VTPCS-No 21
VTPCS-No 22
VTPCS-No 23
VTPCS-No 24
VTPCS-No 25
VTPCS-No 26
VTPCS-No 27
VTPCS-No 28
VTPCS-No 29
VTPCS-No 30
VTPCS-No 31
VTPCS-No 32
VTPCS-No 33
VTPCS-No 34
Appendix
Selection
000000:
000001:
000002:
000003:
000004:
000005:
000006:
000007:
000008:
000009:
000010:
000011:
000012:
000013:
000014:
000015:
000016:
000017:
000018:
000019:
000020:
000021:
000022:
000023:
000024:
000025:
000026:
000027:
000028:
000029:
000030:
000031:
000032:
000033:
000034:
list #18
inactive
VTTIME-No 01
VTTIME-No 02
VTTIME-No 03
VTTIME-No 04
VTTIME-No 05
VTTIME-No 06
VTTIME-No 07
VTTIME-No 08
VTTIME-No 09
VTTIME-No 10
VTTIME-No 11
VTTIME-No 12
VTTIME-No 13
VTTIME-No 14
VTTIME-No 15
VTTIME-No 16
VTTIME-No 17
VTTIME-No 18
VTTIME-No 19
VTTIME-No 20
VTTIME-No 21
VTTIME-No 22
VTTIME-No 23
VTTIME-No 24
VTTIME-No 25
VTTIME-No 26
VTTIME-No 27
VTTIME-No 28
VTTIME-No 29
VTTIME-No 30
VTTIME-No 31
VTTIME-No 32
VTTIME-No 33
VTTIME-No 34
Selection
000000:
000001:
000002:
000003:
000004:
000005:
000006:
000007:
000008:
000009:
000010:
000011:
000012:
000013:
000014:
000015:
000016:
000017:
000018:
000019:
000020:
000021:
000022:
000023:
000024:
000025:
000026:
000027:
000028:
000029:
000030:
000031:
000032:
list #19
Prg. end
PS 01
PS 02
PS 03
PS 04
PS 05
PS 06
PS 07
PS 08
PS 09
PS 10
PS 11
PS 12
PS 13
PS 14
PS 15
PS 16
PS 17
PS 18
PS 19
PS 20
PS 21
PS 22
PS 23
PS 24
PS 25
PS 26
PS 27
PS 28
PS 29
PS 30
PS 31
PS 32
Selection
000000:
000001:
000002:
000003:
000004:
000005:
000006:
000007:
000008:
000009:
000010:
000011:
000012:
000013:
000014:
000015:
000016:
000017:
000018:
000019:
000020:
000021:
000022:
000023:
000024:
000025:
000026:
000027:
000028:
000029:
000030:
000031:
000032:
000033:
000034:
000035:
000036:
000037:
000038:
000039:
000040:
000041:
000042:
000043:
000044:
000045:
000046:
000047:
000048:
000049:
000050:
000051:
000052:
000053:
000054:
000055:
000056:
list #20
inactive
VTPOS-No 001
VTPOS-No 002
VTPOS-No 003
VTPOS-No 004
VTPOS-No 005
VTPOS-No 006
VTPOS-No 007
VTPOS-No 008
VTPOS-No 009
VTPOS-No 010
VTPOS-No 011
VTPOS-No 012
VTPOS-No 013
VTPOS-No 014
VTPOS-No 015
VTPOS-No 016
VTPOS-No 017
VTPOS-No 018
VTPOS-No 019
VTPOS-No 020
VTPOS-No 021
VTPOS-No 022
VTPOS-No 023
VTPOS-No 024
VTPOS-No 025
VTPOS-No 026
VTPOS-No 027
VTPOS-No 028
VTPOS-No 029
VTPOS-No 030
VTPOS-No 031
VTPOS-No 032
VTPOS-No 033
VTPOS-No 034
VTPOS-No 035
VTPOS-No 036
VTPOS-No 037
VTPOS-No 038
VTPOS-No 039
VTPOS-No 040
VTPOS-No 041
VTPOS-No 042
VTPOS-No 043
VTPOS-No 044
VTPOS-No 045
VTPOS-No 046
VTPOS-No 047
VTPOS-No 048
VTPOS-No 049
VTPOS-No 050
VTPOS-No 051
VTPOS-No 052
VTPOS-No 053
VTPOS-No 054
VTPOS-No 055
VTPOS-No 056
000057:
000058:
000059:
000060:
000061:
000062:
000063:
000064:
000065:
000066:
000067:
000068:
000069:
000070:
000071:
000072:
000073:
000074:
000075:
000076:
000077:
000078:
000079:
000080:
000081:
000082:
000083:
000084:
000085:
000086:
000087:
000088:
000089:
000090:
000091:
000092:
000093:
000094:
000095:
000096:
000097:
000098:
000099:
000100:
000101:
000102:
000103:
000104:
VTPOS-No 057
VTPOS-No 058
VTPOS-No 059
VTPOS-No 060
VTPOS-No 061
VTPOS-No 062
VTPOS-No 063
VTPOS-No 064
VTPOS-No 065
VTPOS-No 066
VTPOS-No 067
VTPOS-No 068
VTPOS-No 069
VTPOS-No 070
VTPOS-No 071
VTPOS-No 072
VTPOS-No 073
VTPOS-No 074
VTPOS-No 075
VTPOS-No 076
VTPOS-No 077
VTPOS-No 078
VTPOS-No 079
VTPOS-No 080
VTPOS-No 081
VTPOS-No 082
VTPOS-No 083
VTPOS-No 084
VTPOS-No 085
VTPOS-No 086
VTPOS-No 087
VTPOS-No 088
VTPOS-No 089
VTPOS-No 090
VTPOS-No 091
VTPOS-No 092
VTPOS-No 093
VTPOS-No 094
VTPOS-No 095
VTPOS-No 096
VTPOS-No 097
VTPOS-No 098
VTPOS-No 099
VTPOS-No 100
VTPOS-No 101
VTPOS-No 102
VTPOS-No 103
VTPOS-No 104
9300POSBA1098
11-73
Appendix
11.4
Motor selection list

Tip!
Enter themotor typeunder codeC0086 to parameterizethecontroller. In thefuture,
this value can be obtained from the nameplate.
Example: 161. The motor designation behind this number is shown in the display
(DSKS56-33-200).
11-74
9300POSBA1098
Appendix
Lenze motor
type
C0086
Value
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
40
41
42
43
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
Name
MDSKA56-140
MDFKA71-120
MDSKA71-140
MDFKA80-60
MDSKA80-70
MDFKA80-120
MDSKA80-140
MDFKA90-60
MDSKA90-80
MDFKA90-120
MDSKA90-140
MDFKA100-60
MDSKA100-80
MDFKA100-120
MDSKA100-140
MDFKA112-60
MDSKA112-85
MDFKA112-120
MDSKA112-140
DFQA100-50
DFQA100-100
DFQA112-28
DFQA112-58
DFQA132-20
DFQA132-42
DFQA112-50
DFQA112-100
DFQA132-36
DFQA132-76
DSVA56-140
DFVA71-120
DSVA71-140
DFVA80-60
DSVA80-70
DFVA80-120
DSVA80-140
DFVA90-60
DSVA90-80
DFVA90-120
DSVA90-140
DFVA100-60
DSVA100-80
DFVA100-120
DSVA100-140
DFVA112-60
DSVA112-85
DFVA112-120
DSVA112-140
MDSKAXX056-22
MDFKAXX071-22
MDSKAXX071-22
MDFKAXX080-22
MDSKAXX080-22
MDFKAXX080-22
MDSKAXX080-22
MDFKAXX090-22
MDSKAXX090-22
MDFKAXX090-22
MDSKAXX090-22
MDFKAXX100-22
MDSKAXX100-22
MDFKAXX100-22
MDSKAXX100-22
MDFKAXX112-22
MDSKAXX112-22
MDFKAXX112-22
MDSKAXX112-22
MDFQAXX100-22
MDFQAXX100-22
MDFQAXX112-22
MDFQAXX112-22
MDFQAXX132-32
MDFQAXX132-32
MDFQAXX112-22
MDFQAXX112-22
MDFQAXX132-32
MDFQAXX132-32
DSVAXX056-22
DFVAXX071-22
DSVAXX071-22
DFVAXX080-22
DSVAXX080-22
DFVAXX080-22
DSVAXX080-22
DFVAXX090-22
DSVAXX090-22
DFVAXX090-22
DSVAXX090-22
DFVAXX100-22
DSVAXX100-22
DFVAXX100-22
DSVAXX100-22
DFVAXX112-22
DSVAXX112-22
DFVAXX112-22
DSVAXX112-22
C0081
C0087
C0088
C0089
C0090
Pr [kW]
0.80
2.20
1.70
2.10
1.40
3.90
2.30
3.80
2.60
6.90
4.10
6.40
4.00
13.20
5.20
11.00
6.40
20.30
7.40
10.60
20.30
11.50
22.70
17.00
40.30
20.10
38.40
36.40
60.10
0.80
2.20
1.70
2.10
1.40
3.90
2.30
3.80
2.60
6.90
4.10
6.40
4.00
13.20
5.20
11.00
6.40
20.30
7.40
nr [rpm]
3950
3410
4050
1635
2000
3455
4100
1680
2300
3480
4110
1700
2340
3510
4150
1710
2490
3520
4160
1420
2930
760
1670
550
1200
1425
2935
1030
2235
3950
3410
4050
1635
2000
3455
4100
1680
2300
3480
4110
1700
2340
3510
4150
1710
2490
3520
4160
Ir [A]
2.4
6.0
4.4
4.8
3.3
9.1
5.8
8.5
5.5
15.8
10.2
13.9
8.2
28.7
14.0
22.5
13.5
42.5
19.8
26.5
46.9
27.2
49.1
45.2
88.8
43.7
81.9
77.4
144.8
2.4
6.0
4.4
4.8
3.3
9.1
5.8
8.5
5.5
1.8
10.2
13.9
8.2
28.7
14.0
22.5
13.5
42.5
19.8
fr [Hz]
140
120
140
60
70
120
140
60
80
120
140
60
80
120
140
60
85
120
140
50
100
28
58
20
42
50
100
39
76
140
120
140
60
70
120
140
60
80
120
140
60
80
120
140
60
85
120
140
ar [V]
Motor type
Thermal
sensor
Asynchronous servo
motor
KTY
Asynchronous servo
motor
TKO
(Thermal
contact))
390
350
390
330
390
320
360
340
390
350
390
330
390
320
9300POSBA1098
11-75
Appendix
C0086
Value
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
11-76
Name
DSKS36-13-200
DSKS36-23-200
MDSKS56-23-150
MDSKS56-33-150
MDSKS71-13-150
MDFKS71-13-150
MDSKS71-23-150
MDFKS71-23-150
MDSKS71-33-150
MDFKS71-33-150
DSKS56-23-190
DSKS56-33-200
DSKS71-03-170
DFKS71-03-165
DSKS71-13-185
DFKS71-13-180
DSKS71-33-180
DFKS71-33-175
9300POSBA1098
Lenze motor
type
C0081
C0087
C0088
C0089
C0090
MDSKSXX036-13
MDSKSXX036-23
MDSKSXX056-23
MDSKSXX056-33
MDSKSXX071-13
MDFKSXX071-13
MDSKSXX071-23
MDFKSXX071-23
MDSKSXX071-33
MDFKSXX071-33
MDSKSXX056-23
MDSKSXX056-33
MDSKSXX071-03
MDFKSXX071-03
MDSKSXX071-13
MDFKSXX071-13
MDSKSXX071-33
MDFKSXX071-33
Pr [kW]
0.25
0.54
0.60
0.91
1.57
2.29
2.33
3.14
3.11
4.24
1.1
1.8
2.0
2.6
3.2
4.1
4.6
5.9
nr [rpm]
4000
4000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3800
4000
3400
3300
3700
3600
3600
3500
Ir [A]
0.9
1.1
1.25
2.0
3.1
4.35
4.85
6.25
6.7
9.1
2.3
3.6
4.2
5.6
7.0
9.2
10.0
13.1
fr [Hz]
200
200
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
190
200
170
165
185
180
180
175
ar [V]
245
345
350
340
360
385
360
375
330
345
330
325
330
330
325
325
325
325
Motor type
SynchroS
h
no s servo
nous
motor
Thermal
sensor
KTY
Appendix
Lenze motor
type
C0086
Value
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
Name
DXRAXX071-12-50
DXRAXX071-22-50
DXRAXX080-12-50
DXRAXX080-22-50
DXRAXX090-12-50
DXRAXX090-32-50
DXRAXX100-22-50
DXRAXX100-32-50
DXRAXX112-12-50
DXRAXX132-12-50
DXRAXX132-22-50
DXRAXX160-12-50
DXRAXX160-22-50
DXRAXX180-12-50
DXRAXX180-22-50
30kW-ASM-50
37kW-ASM-50
45kW-ASM-50
55kW-ASM-50
75kW-ASM-50
DXRAXX071-12-87
DXRAXX071-22-87
DXRAXX080-12-87
DXRAXX080-22-87
DXRAXX090-12-87
DXRAXX090-32-87
DXRAXX100-22-87
DXRAXX100-32-87
DXRAXX112-12-87
DXRAXX132-12-87
DXRAXX132-22-87
DXRAXX160-12-87
DXRAXX160-22-87
DXRAXX180-12-87
DXRAXX180-22-87
30kW-ASM-50
37kW-ASM-50
45kW-ASM-50
55kW-ASM-50
75kW-ASM-50
DXRAXX071-12
DXRAXX071-22
DXRAXX080-12
DXRAXX080-22
DXRAXX090-12
DXRAXX090-32
DXRAXX100-22
DXRAXX100-32
DXRAXX112-12
DXRAXX132-12
DXRAXX132-22
DXRAXX160-12
DXRAXX160-22
DXRAXX180-12
DXRAXX180-22
DXRAXX071-12
DXRAXX071-22
DXRAXX080-12
DXRAXX080-22
DXRAXX090-12
DXRAXX090-32
DXRAXX100-22
DXRAXX100-32
DXRAXX112-12
DXRAXX132-12
DXRAXX132-22
DXRAXX160-12
DXRAXX160-22
DXRAXX180-12
DXRAXX180-22
-
C0081
C0087
C0088
C0089
C0090
Pr [kW]
0.25
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.10
1.50
2.20
3.00
4.00
5.50
7.50
11.00
15. 00
18.50
22.00
30.00
37.00
45.00
55.00
75.00
0.43
0.64
0.95
1.3
2.0
2.7
3.9
5.35
7.10
9.7
13.2
19.3
26.4
32.4
38.7
52.00
64.00
78.00
95.00
130.00
n r [rpm]
1410
1398
1400
1410
1420
1415
1425
1415
1435
1450
1450
1460
1460
1470
1456
1470
1470
1480
1480
1480
2525
2515
2515
2525
2535
2530
2535
2530
2545
2555
2555
2565
2565
2575
2560
2546
2546
2563
2563
2563
Ir [A]
0.9
1.2
1.7
2.3
2.7
3.6
4.8
6.6
8.3
11.0
14.6
21.0
27.8
32.8
38.8
52.0
66.0
82.0
93.0
132.0
1.5
2.0
2.9
4.0
4.7
6.2
8.3
11.4
14.3
19.1
25.4
36.5
48.4
57.8
67.4
90.0
114.0
142.0
161.0
228.0
f r [Hz]
ar [V]
50
400
Motor type
Asynchronous
inverter
motor
(i star
(in
t
connection)
Thermal
sensor
TKO
(Thermal
contact))
87
400
Asynchronous
inverter
motor
(i ddelta
(in
lt
connection)
TKO
(Thermal
contact))
9300POSBA1098
11-77
Appendix
11.5
Table of attributes
The table of attributes contains information on parameters which are necessary for
the communication to the controller. This information is required to generate
customized control programs.
Code
DS
Format
DT
DL
LCM-R/W
DA
DYN
Index
dez/hex
11-78
9300POSBA1098
Lenze code number

Data structure
E=
Simple variable (one parameter element)
A=
Array variable (selection of several parameter elements for the input selection by the code
or LECOM subcode)
Data type
B8 =
B16 =
B32 =
VS =
U32 =
I32 =
FIX32 =
1 byte bit-coded
2 byte bit-coded
4 byte bit-coded
ASCII string
4 byte without sign
4 byte with sign
32-bit value with sign; decimal with four digital after the comma
Examples:
1.2 = 12000FIX32-dez 00002EEOFIX32-hex
-10.45 = -104500FIX32-dez
FFFF67CCFIX32-hex
N16 = 16 bit value with sign; 0 = 0; 100 % = 214

100 % = 16384N16-dez 4000N16-hex
-50 % = -8192N16-dez E000N16-hex
Data length in byte
Access authorization for LECOM
Ra =
Reading is always permitted
W=
Writing depends on certain conditions (e.g. operating mode, controller inhibit)
WA =
Writing is always permitted
Number of array elements (subcode)
Valid only for operation via operating module 9371 BB
For control via
Number (index) for the addressing of the parameter
- INTERBUS
- PROFIBUS
Number (index) for the addressing of the parameter
- System bus (CAN)
Appendix
11.6
Glossary
Term
CE
Code
Meaning
Communaut Europenne (English: European Community)
For entry and display (access) of parameter values
Variable addressing according to the format code/subcode (Cxxxx/xx)
All variables can be addressed via the code digits.
Contouring error
Deviation between momentary position setpoint and actual position. Display for a momentary following
error under C0908.
Contouring error monitoring
Monitors the momentary contouring error if the contouring error tolerance is exceeded and releases a
fault indication, if necessary.
Contouring error tolerance

Ctrl. enable
Ctrl. inhibit
Fieldbus
GDC
INTERBUS
LECOM
LU
OU
PC
PM
QSP
RFG
Target position
If the contouring error reaches a defined contouring error tolerance, a fault indication is released.
Controller enable
Controller inhibit ( = Controller enable )
For data exchange between superimposed control and positioning control, e.g. INTERBUS or PROFIBUS
Global Drive Control (PC-program (Windows) for Lenze controllers)
Industrial communication standard to DIN E19258
Lenze Communication
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Personal Computer
Permanent magnet
Quick stop
Ramp generator
The target which is to be approached by means of a defined traversing profile
9300POSBA1098
11-79
Appendix
11.7
Index
C
Accessories, 11-1
Accessory kit, 1-1
Additional module, Interbus-S, 3-1
aggressive gases, 3-1
Application as directed, 1-2
Assembly, 3-1
with fixing brackets or rails, 3-2
Automatic control parameter identification, 5-29

Automation interface, 4-27
B
Brake unit, 4-17
Bus connection, 4-26
Cable cross-sections, 3-6, 4-14

Control cables, 4-20
Mains connection, 4-14
Motor connection, 4-17
Cable specification, 4-12

Calculate control parameters, 5-30
CANopen, 4-26
Circuit diagram, Control connections, 4-22
Cleaning, 9-1
Code table, 11-2
Collective screen plate, 4-20
Commissioning, 5-1
Controller, 5-5
Initial switch-on, 5-1
Sequence, 5-4
Configuration
Monitoring, 7-2
with Global Drive Control, 7-1
Connection
Brake unit, 4-17
Control, Circuit diagram, 4-22
Mains, 4-13
Motor, 4-15
Connections, Power, 4-13

Control
Describe dialog box, 5-25
Program, 5-28

Control connections, 4-20
Control terminals, 4-20
max. permissible cross-sections, for motor connection,
4-20
Overview, 4-20
Protection against inverse polarity, 4-20
Terminal assignment, 4-20
Controller, 1-1
Adapt mains, 5-8
Adapt to the motor, 5-8
Application as directed, 1-2
Cold Plate technique, 4-6
Identification, 1-2
Switch on, 5-5
Controller enable, 5-12

Controller protection, 2-2
Cooling air, 3-1
Current derating, 6-4
11-80
9300POSBA1098
Appendix
Definitions, 1-1
History buffer, 8-3
Dimensions, 3-7
Assembly, 8-3
Working with the, 8-5
Standard devices, 3-2
Drive, Controller enable, 5-12
Homing
Drive system, 1-1
Manual homing, 5-27

Parameters, 5-26
E
Electrical data
200% overcurrent, 3-4
Types 9321 to 9325, 3-3
Types 9326 to 9332, 3-5
I
Identification, 5-29
EMC
Controller, 1-2
Assembly, 4-34
CE-typical drive system, Installation, 4-34
Filters, 4-34
Grounding, 4-35
Installation, 4-34
Screening, 4-35
Information on operation, 6-3

Inputs
analog, 4-21
digital, 4-21
Encoder connection, 4-32
Installation
CE-typical drive system, 4-34
Assembly, 4-34
Filters, 4-34
Grounding, 4-35
Screening, 4-35
Cold Plate, 4-6
electrical, 4-9
mechanical, 3-1
Standard assembly, 3-2
F
FAIL-QSP, 7-3
Fault indication, Reset, 8-11
Fault indications, 8-7
Feedback signals, 4-30
Encoder connection, 4-32
Resolver connection, 4-31
Temperature monitoring, 4-28
Insulation, 4-9
Free space, 3-1

Fuses, 3-6
J
Jumper, Analog setpoint selection, 4-21
G
GDC
Offline mode, 5-6
Online mode, 5-6
Switch on, 5-6
Global Drive Control, 11-1
L
Legal regulations, 1-2
Status indications, 6-2
Glossary, 11-79
Liability, 1-2
9300POSBA1098
11-81
Appendix
Machine parameters, Enter, 5-10
Parameter set
Generate, 5-7
Load, 5-23
save. Siehe Parameter set transfer
Mains, Adapt controller, 5-8

Mains conditions, 4-12
Parameters
Enter for machine, 5-10
enter into program set, 5-21
Generate set of, 5-7
Homing, 5-26
load set of, 5-23
Manual positioning, 5-11
Positioning profile, 5-15
save set of. Siehe Parameter set transfer
Fuses, 4-14
Mains filters, 3-7

Mains types, 4-12
Maintenance, 9-1
Manual homing, 5-27
Manual positioning, Parameters, 5-11
Password protection, 5-32

PC, Switch-on, 5-6
Manufacturer, 1-2
PC program, Global Drive Control, 11-1
Message, 7-3
Positioning profile
Assembly, 5-17
Enter parameters, 5-15
Messages, Fault, 8-7

Monitor output, 4-21
Positioning program, Process program set, 5-20
Monitoring, 7-2
Power connections, 4-13
FAIL-QSP, 7-3
Message, 7-3
Monitoring functions, 7-6
Off, 7-3
Reactions, 7-2
Set reactions, 7-4
TRIP, 7-2
Warning, 7-3
max. permissible cross-sections

for mains connection, 4-14
for motor connection, 4-17
Program, set, processing, 5-20

Program control, 5-28
Program set
Enter parameters, 5-21
processing, 5-20
Motor
Adapt controller, 5-8
Selection list, 11-74
Motor cable, Screening, 4-15

Motor connection, 4-15, 4-16
Motor protection, 4-11
Protection against inverse polarity, 4-20

Protection of devices, Current derating, 6-4
Protection of persons, 2-2
punching, 4-3
Notes on operation, 6-3
O
Operating conditions, 3-2
Operating module, Status indications, 6-1
Oscillations, 3-1
Outputs
analog, 4-21
digital, 4-21
Overspeeds, 2-2
11-82
Protection against contact, 4-9
9300POSBA1098
Ratings
200% overcurrent, 3-4
cable cross-sections, 3-6
Controllers 9321 to 9325, 3-3
Fuses, 3-6
Mains filter, 3-7
Types 9326 to 9332, 3-5
RCCB, 4-9
RCCBs, 4-9
Reset, Fault indication, 8-11
Residual hazards, 2-2
Resolver connection, 4-31
Appendix
T
Technical data, 3-1
Safety information, 2-1
Dimensions, 3-7
Electrical data, 3-3
Features, 3-1
General data/operating conditions, 3-2
Layout, 2-2
Other notes, 2-2
Warning of damage to persons, 2-2
Warning to damage to material, 2-2
Temperature monitoring, 4-28

Thermal separation, 4-3
Scope of supply, 1-1
Tightening torques
Control terminals, 4-20
Power terminals, 4-14, 4-17
Screening
Transport, storage, 2-1
Control cable, 4-20

EMC, 4-35
Motor cable, 4-15
TRIP, 7-2
Troubleshooting, 8-1
Selection list, 11-65

Servo inverter. Siehe Controller
U
Use, as directed, 1-2
State bus, 4-25

Status indications
Global Drive Control, 6-1
Operating module, 6-1
Switch-on, 5-1
Controller, 5-5
GDC, 5-6
PC, 5-6
Switching on the motor side, 4-17
V
Vibrations, 3-1
Voltage drop, 4-14
W
Warning, 7-3
Warranty, 1-2
Waste disposal, 1-2, 10-1
9300POSBA1098
11-83
Appendix
11-84
9300POSBA1098
Appendix
9300POSBA1098
11-85
Appendix
11-86
9300POSBA1098

Ba93psgb PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Ba93psgb PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

EDB9300UEP

Crorresponds to the German edition of 08/1998

Screen plate for mains connection

Detachable operating module

System bus (CAN)

Digital frequency input

Digital frequency output

Screen plate for control connections

Preface and general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to use these Operating Instructions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Generate parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Function test with manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enter positioning profile parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuration with Global Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motor selection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preface and general information

Preface and general information

How to use these Operating Instructions ...

In the following text used for

Preface and general information

93XX servo position controller

Safety and application notes for controllers

Layout of the safety information

Warns of potential, very hazardous situation.

General data/ Operating conditions

Permissible temperature ranges

during transport of the controller:

Permissible installation height h

Low Voltage Directive

Types 9321 to 9325

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 480 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz

Types 9321 to 9324 with 200% overcurrent

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400 V /

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 480 V /

150 % IrX for 60 s

75 % IrX for 120 s

200 % IrX for 10 s

Types 9326 to 9332

EVS9326- EVS9327- EVS9328- EVS9329- EVS9330- EVS9331- EVS9332EP

EVS9326- EVS9327- EVS9328CP

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 400 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz

Ratings for operation at a mains: 3 AC / 480 V / 50 Hz/60 Hz

Fuses and cable cross-sections

Operation without mains filter

Input +UG, -UG

Operation with mains filter

The DC bus fuses are connected in parallel

For the operation of the controllers in a UL-approved plant:

Connection of the motor cables

Lenze order number

for RFI degree B

Standard assembly with fixing rails or fixing brackets

Dimensions for assembly with fixing rails/fixing brackets

When using a plug-on fieldbus module:

Controllers 9321 to 9326

Assembly with thermally separated power stage

Dimensions of the types 9321 to 9326

Dimensions for assembly with thermally separated power stage

When using a plug-on fieldbus module: